FR-E800 catalog
File info: application/pdf · 140 pages · 22.08MB
FR-E800 catalog
L-06131ENG-C
FR-E800 catalog - Mitsubishi Electric
Our setup information web page provides easy access to manuals, videos, ... (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection) for the switching of the control ...
Mitsubishi Electric Factory Automation
[PDF] FR-E800 catalog - Valin Corporation
Users can scan the QR code on the product to directly access the setup information. ... G232. Torque bias 2. 600% to 1400%, 9999. 1%. 9999. 843. G233. Torque bias ...
Extracted Text
INVERTER
FR-E800
Addition of 11K to 22K Models for Three-Phase 200/400 V Class Inverters
Global Player
GLOBAL IMPACT OF MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Through Mitsubishi Electric's vision, "Changes for the Better" are possible for a brighter future.
Mitsubishi Electric is involved in many areas including the following
We bring together the best minds to create the best technologies. At Mitsubishi Electric, we understand that technology is the driving force of change in our lives. By bringing greater comfort to daily life, maximizing the efficiency of businesses and keeping things running across society, we integrate technology and innovation to bring changes for the better.
Energy and Electric Systems A wide range of power and electrical products from generators to large-scale displays.
Electronic Devices A wide portfolio of cutting-edge semiconductor devices for systems and products.
Home Appliance Dependable consumer products like air conditioners and home entertainment systems.
Information and Communication Systems Commercial and consumer-centric equipment, products and systems.
Industrial Automation Systems Maximizing productivity and efficiency with cutting-edge automation technology.
2
Contents
Features Operation Panel, Operation Steps Parameter List Protective Functions Standard Specifications Outline Dimensions Terminal Connection Diagram, Terminal Specifications Example Connections Options Low-Voltage Switchgear/Cables Precaution on Selection and Operation Compatible Motors Compatibility Warranty Support
4
42
1
47
2
63
3
67
4
72
5
74
6
80
7
82
8
106
9
112
10
119
11
129
12
135
13
136
14
3
Design future manufacturing
FR-E800--World's smallest class inverter with high functionality
Ever since the Industrial Revolution, manufacturing technologies have evolved over the years. And now, this is the time for new revolution. A new era has started. Inverters are connected to the world. We design future manufacturing and what's ahead.
4
E800-E Ethernet model E800-SCE Safety communication model
E800 Standard model
Product video 5
IoT
Smart factory made possible through industrial IoT
AI
Artificial intelligence (AI) supports users in various ways
6
Real-time connection with the host IT system enables centralized or remote monitoring of operation, which further streamlines the production.
1 Improving productivity by supporting CC-Link IE TSN as standard
Real-time production data collection is enabled by high-speed, stable P13
communication, which contributes to improvement of productivity.
2 Expanding a range of applications with multi-protocols
Multi-protocol support enables switching between various types of communication networks. Protocols of major global industrial Ethernet networks are supported by the inverter without using a plug-in option.
EtherNet/IP
PROFINET
P13
EtherCAT, etc.
3 Enabling flexible connection with two Ethernet ports provided as standard
Connection in line topology without using a switching hub is enabled, which widens the choice of connection methods.
Two Ethernet
P14
ports
AI technology and smartphone connectivity support initial startup or troubleshooting. Extensive maintenance functions will contribute to improvement in maintainability.
1 Reducing downtime using the AI function
The AI fault diagnosis function is used to identify the cause of a fault, enabling the fastest troubleshooting procedure.
AI fault
P27
diagnosis
2 Enhancing predictive maintenance
Integrating the world's first*1 "Corrosive-Attack-Level Alert System (CALASTM)"*2 makes it possible to identify signs of inverter damage caused by corrosive gas. The environmental impact diagnosis function for the control circuit board enables visualization of the environment where the inverter is installed, enhancing maintainability and preventing faults (for coated models (-60/-06) only).
*1: According to our investigation as of September 10, 2019. *2: Patent applied for.
Alert system for the risk of corrosive damage (degree of corrosion) of electrical equipment
Environmental
P25
impact diagnosis
function
3 Further facilitating operation with your smartphone
Using smartphones or tablets, users can scan the QR code on the product to access the setup information, or can access inverters via wireless network with a mobile app. This will contribute to reduction in startup time and improvement in maintainability.
Engineering software
P28
7
Safety
Advanced harmony between humans and FA devices
Performance
Various solutions achieved by the outstanding drive performance
8
Available when the plug-in option is connected.
Functional safety functions and wireless inverter connection enable stable and safe operation of the system.
1 Reducing the costs for safety
The inverter is compliant with safety integrity level (SIL) 2 or 3 of the IEC 61508
Functional safety
P21
standard for functional safety.
Safety monitoring functions conforming to IEC 61800-5-2, such as the safe torque off
(STO) and safely-limited speed (SLS) functions, ensure safe operation for users.
2 Configuring simple safety systems
The inverter supporting safety communication eliminate the needs of preparing separate safety communication devices or complex wiring for both control and network cables.
Safety
P15
communication
3 Ensuring operators' safety by wireless interfaces
Adjustments of inverter parameters and inverter monitoring can be performed wirelessly away from the system, ensuring operators' safety.
Ethernet
P20
connection*1
*1: Several conditions must be met to use this function.
Various control methods are supported to expand applications in many systems.
1 Supporting various control methods
Various control methods such as Vector control (with encoder), Real sensorless vector control (without encoder), and positioning without using sensors are supported. Premium efficiency motors and PM motors are supported, enabling applications in various solutions.
Control method
P19
2 Expanding applications with the enhanced product line
The product line is enhanced as compared to the preceding FR-E700 inverters.
� 18.5K and 22K models supported � 575 V class supported � Surrounding air temperature of -20�C to 60�C*1
� Compliance with IEC 60721-3-3(3C2)*2 for corrosive gas concentration
� IP67 models (FR-E846)
Expanded capacity range / improved
environmental resistance
*1: Derating required for 50�C or higher. *2: Coated model (-60/-06) only
P16
9
Useful functions for each of the design, operation, and maintenance processes of systems
FR-E800 inverters have various functions to attract more customers by offering safe and reliable operation for a long time. This is the time to start innovation in the fields of manufacturing.
10
1
Design
2
3
4
Operation
5
6
Maintenance
7
8 Engineering tools
Toward smart factory
Supporting various networks enable flexible system design.
P12-15
Wide range of applications
The expanded range of capacities and dimensions supports various applications.
P1617
Higher added values
The outstanding drive performance and various functions create higher added values.
P1819
Improved safety
Humans and FA devices can work together by enhancing functional safety.
P2021
Energy saving
Use of induction motors or IPM motors contributes to energy saving.
P2223
Improved maintainability
Functions for residual life diagnosis, predictive maintenance, and preventive
P2425
maintenance support stable system operation.
Downtime reduction
When a fault occurs, AI analysis and other diagnosis functions solve the problem quickly.
P2627
Engineering software for further ease of operation
The work efficiency can be improved for each of the design, operation, and maintenance processes.
P28-31
11
1
Design
Toward smart factory
Supporting various networks enable flexible system design.
Smart factory
Office
Internet
Warehouse
Real-time remote monitoring of operation of each factory enables interconnection between factories. In case of troubles, quick detection enables fast recovery.
Products are stored in a warehouse. Stock control information is shared with the office and the factories.
12
Factory A
Production volume is adjusted based on the warehouse condition.
Factory B
Production volume of Factory B is adjusted efficiently based on the production condition of Factory A.
Design
Less workload required for system construction
E800
E800-E
CC-Link IE TSN supported as standard
� Deterministic performance of cyclic communication is maintained even when mixed with slower information data (non real-time). This enables TCP/IP communication devices to be used without affecting overall control.
� Network device profiles are available to facilitate network construction.
MELSEC
Data communication
Control communication
Video for quick and easy connection
100
Link scan time occupancy rate (%)
0
Network load diagram
E800-SCE
Data communication band Control communication band Time
� Non-FA devices that support SLMP and TCP/IP communication can also connect to the network. Inverters can connect to a variety of devices, enabling use with versatile devices.
Standard Ethernet communication (HTTP, FTP etc.)
MELSEC
Programmable controller
Inverter
Remote I/O
HMI
Vision sensor Barcode reader
Compatibility with global networks
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Multi-protocols
Inverter models that support protocols of major global industrial Ethernet networks are available. FR-E800 inverters support a variety of open networks without using any options, enabling the use of inverters on the existing network and assuring compatibility with various systems. Users can select a protocol group suitable for the intended system. It is possible to switch between protocols only by setting parameters. (Supported protocols differ depending on the model.)
Model
CC-Link IE TSN (100 Mbps)*1
FR-E800-[]EPA
FR-E800-[]EPB
FR-E800-[]EPC
--
*1: 1 Gbps is optional (to be supported).
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
--
Supported protocols
MODBUS�/TCP
PROFINET
--
--
--
EtherNet/IP
-- --
BACnet/IP
EtherCAT
--
--
--
--
: Supported : To be supported soon
13
1
Design
Toward smart factory
Supporting various networks enable flexible system design.
Supporting various topologies
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Two Ethernet ports
Two Ethernet ports are provided as standard, enabling flexible connection in line topology without using a switching hub. (Ring topology will be supported later. For PROFINET, only line topology and star topology are supported.) Complex networks can be created just by connecting devices with a cable to a free port. The network can even accommodate changes in the specifications of devices.
Line topology
The total wiring length can be minimized for large or extensive systems. Eliminating a switching hub allows more flexible installation of inverters even in a
MELSEC
narrow space.
Star topology
A fault in one device does not affect MELSEC
other devices. Fast recovery is enabled when a fault occurs as it is easy to know which device is faulty.
Enabling construction of a small-scale synchronous system of inverters E800 E800-E E800-SCE
Inverter-to-inverter link function
Communication between multiple inverters is carried out through the I/O device and special register transmission of the PLC function (refer to page 18). A small-scale system can be created by connecting multiple inverters via Ethernet. (The FR-A800-E inverter or the FR-F800-E inverter can be mixed in the system.)
100 Mbps
FR-E800 (master)
FR-E800 (slave 1)
FR-E800 (slave 2)
FR-E800 (slave 3)
FR-E800 (slave 4)
Inverter (slave 5)
Motor Fan Master
14
Slave
Design
Simple configuration with less wiring using safety communication models E800 E800-E E800-SCE
Safety communication model
Safety communication models support Ethernet-based safety communication protocols certified as compliant with international standards. The safety control system on the existing network can be easily enhanced with less cost.
Model
FR-E800-[]SCEPA FR-E800-[]SCEPB FR-E800-[]SCEPC
CC-Link IE TSN Safety communication
function
�
PROFIsafe
� �
CIP Safety
FSoE (Safety over EtherCAT)
�
�
�
�
: Supported : To be supported soon
Other than safety communication model Safety relay
Safety communication model
Nroelsaayfe*1ty
Programmable controller
Safety programmable controller
MELSEC
Control wiring Network wiring
Security measures
IP filtering function (Ethernet) Set the IP address range for connectable network devices to limit connectable devices.
The IP filtering function (Ethernet) is a means to prevent unwanted access from external devices, but it does not prevent it completely.
FR-E700
MELSEC
Safuestiyngconmetmwuonrkicwatiiroinng
*1: By using a safety programmable controller, safety control and safety communication functions of the safety relay are integrated into the control system.
FR-E800-SCE
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Ethernet command source selection Devices which can control the inverter can be limited by setting the IP address range of the network device(s) used to operate it.
Ethernet function selection
Communication sockets are created only for selected applications to prevent unwanted access.
A communication socket is the interface for sending and receiving data on a specific port.
HTTP
Telnet 15
2
Design
Wide range of applications
The extended range of capacities and dimensions supports various applications.
Supporting various systems and environments
Expanded capacity range
The product line of three-phase 200/400 V class inverters now includes up to 22K models. The capacity range is expanded as compared to the preceding FR-E700 inverters.
improved environmental resistance
Various applications are supported by allowing for corrosive environments or a wide range of surrounding air temperatures. � Surrounding air temperatures
between -20�C and 60�C*1 are supported. (-10�C to +50�C for the FR-E700) � Inverters with circuit board coating (IEC 60721-3-3 3C2)*2 are available for improved environmental resistance.
*1: Derating required for 50�C or higher. *2: Coated model (-60/-06) only.
E800
E800-E
Water treatment plant
E800-SCE
Painting line
16
Design
Effective solution for downsizing equipment
Multiple rating
For the three-phase input model, two rating types of different rated current and permissible load can be selected by setting parameters. The choice of inverters is widened for intended applications of users. When users select the LD rating for light duty applications, inverters with smaller capacities can be used as compared to the FR-E700 series inverters. For example, when the LD rating (light duty) is selected for a 22K inverter, the inverter can drive a motor with a capacity up to 30 kW.
Load
Rating
Light duty LD rating
Normal duty ND rating
Overload current rating 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50�C 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50�C
E800
E800-E
Building water pumps
E800-SCE
Optimizing the layout inside the enclosure
Flexible installation
When the surrounding air temperature is 40�C or less, multiple inverters can be installed side-by-side. Users can select the most suitable layout for the intended installation area.
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Side-by-side installation
Slicer
Enabling installation in various environments
E800
E800-E
IP67 models (400 V class: 0.75K to 3.7K)
Installation outside of the enclosure enables installation closer to machines (FR-E846). Since the inverter is compatible with hostile environments such as high humidity and dusty environments, users can easily install the inverter near the machine or in available spaces. It is possible to reduce line noise by shortening the wiring length between the inverter and the motor.
Automotive production line
E800-SCE
Improving productivity with shorter tact time by the enhanced regeneration function
Built-in brake transistor
With the enhanced power regeneration capability (brake duty: 100% max.), deceleration time can be shortened.*1
*1 : For 200 V class 0.4K and 0.75K models, the brake duty is 30% ED maximum when the lowest resistance value is used. The brake resistor must have a sufficient capacity to consume the regenerative power. For 200 V class 0.1K and 0.2K models, brake transistors are not built in.
Increased excitation deceleration
When the increased magnetic excitation deceleration function is used, the motor consumes the regenerative power and the deceleration time can be reduced without using a brake resistor. The tact time can be reduced for a transfer line or the like.
Automated warehouse
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Airport baggage conveyor
17
3
Design
Higher added values
The outstanding drive performance and various functions create higher added values.
Customizing inverter operation for each machine
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
PLC function
In accordance with the machine specifications, users can set various operation patterns: inverter movements at signal inputs, signal outputs at particular inverter statuses, and monitor outputs, etc. Operation of the system can be customized by the inverter alone. Parameters and setting frequency can be changed at the program. Control programs can be created in sequence ladders using the inverter setup software (FR Configurator2).
Extruding machine Output (Y1) Input (X2)
Stop sensor Input (X1) Deceleration sensor Input (X0) Start sensor Workpiece Output (Y0)
Workpiece
Conveyor robot
Motor
Power supply Transfer conveyor
18
Design
Same spare inverters for various applications
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Control method Switching between control methods with the FR-E800 inverter, Vector control for lift application (with the plug-in option), Advanced magnetic flux vector control for conveyors, etc., reduces the number of required spare inverters.
Accurate and stable transfer
High-performance
Easy
Control V/F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control PM sensorless vector control Vector control (with plug-in option FR-A8AP E kit used)
Speed control
Torque control
�
�
Position control
�
�
�
Motor
Induction motor
�
PM motor
Induction
motor
: Supported : To be supported
Position control Vector control enables accurate transfer of glass or PET bottles to the filling position.
Positioning function (point table method) Position data (target position, speed, acceleration/deceleration time) and so on can be set in the parameters. Positioning is possible for up to 7 points. Positioning operation is performed by selecting point table numbers with external interface signals. Continuous positioning is possible.
Constant-rate feed
Improving work efficiency by powerful high-speed operation
E800
E800-E
PM sensorless vector control
The torque is not reduced in the high-speed range (up to the rated speed) during PM sensorless vector control as compared with operation using a stepper motor. High-speed system operation improves the tact time. PM sensorless vector control is available when inverters are used with PM motors. High-level control such as positioning control is enabled without using an encoder (to be supported). The PM motor offline auto tuning enables sensorless operation of other manufacturers' permanent magnet (PM) motors. (Tuning may be disabled depending on the motor characteristics.)
Speed Increase
speed
Conveyor A Sorting
Conveyor B
Increase speed
Sorting conveyor
E800-SCE
Same
Time Reduced
Expanding the range of applications using inverter options
Plug-in options
In addition to the existing plug-in options to add digital inputs / analog outputs and to support different communication standards, the Vector control compatible option FR-A8AP E kit is supported. Among our compact inverters, the FR-E800 inverter is the first to support Vector control.
Model FR-A8AX E kit FR-A8AY E kit FR-A8AR E kit FR-A8AP E kit FR-E8DS E kit FR-A8NC E kit FR-A8ND E kit FR-A8NP E kit
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
FR-E800 inverter options
Description
Supported
16-bit digital input
Digital output, additional analog output
Relay output
Vector control, encoder feedback control
24VDC input
CC-Link
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS-DP
: Supported : To be supported
19
4
Operation
Improved safety
Humans and FA devices can work together by enhancing functional safety.
Wireless access with hard-to-reach inverters
Ethernet communication
Even if inverters are located in a high place, narrow area, or other hard-to-reach place, wireless access enables adjustments of inverter parameters, inverter monitoring (simultaneous monitoring of multiple axes possible), and inverter maintenance such as life diagnosis checks. The FR-E800 inverter can be connected to FR Configurator2 using a commercially-available industrial wireless LAN*1 access point.*2
Inverter
MELSEC
Programmable controller
Monitor
Wireless LAN access point
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Crane
Ceiling crane
*1: A wireless LAN suitable for the industrial use in severe environments or in environments requiring high reliability (redundancy). *2: Under certain environments or installation conditions, Ethernet communication through wireless LAN is not as stable as communication through wired LAN. Before starting
operation, always check the communication status. Inverter operation (output shutoff, deceleration stop, etc.) when communication fails (due to reasons such as disconnection) can be selected by setting parameters. For applications requiring data transmission or update periodically or within a certain time period, a wired connection is recommended.
20
Attaining both safety and productivity
Functional safety
The inverter is compliant with ISO 13849-1 and IEC 61508. This will contribute to reduction in the initial safety certification cost. Using the safety sub-functions compliant with IEC 61800-5-2 for the machinery or equipment will contribute to eliminate external devices or reduction in maintenance time, and ensure operators' safety. (Several conditions must be met to use this function.) This will significantly reduce time required for maintenance or tooling and eliminate external devices such as ones used for monitoring the speed. Use FR Configurator2 to set parameters related to the safety monitoring functions.
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Safety level (ISO 13849-1, Safety sub-function IEC 61508) (IEC 61800-5-2)
STO Safety torque off, coasting to stop
SS1
Safe stop 1, deceleration monitoring
SLS SBC SSM
Safely-limited speed Safe brake control Safe speed monitor
SIL2, PLd, Cat.3
FR-E800, FR-E800-E
�
� � �
SIL3, PLe, Cat.3
SIL2, PLd, Cat.3
FR-E800-SCE FR-E700-SC
�
: Supported
� � � �: Not supported
STO (safe torque off) function
Driving power to the motor is electronically shut off by responding to the input signal from external equipment.
Speed V
Stop category 0
(Uncontrolled stop) Speed
Time
E800
Without STO function
Emergency stop
E800-E E800-SCE
Two MCs required � High cost � High maintenance
(maintenance for two) � Large installation space
RUN MON PRM PU EXT NET
RUN
STOP RESET
MODE SET
PU EXT
Use the STO function.
� Magnetic contactor (MC) � Emergency stop wiring
With STO function
FR-E700
Safety stop function (STO) cuts down the number of MCs to one! *1 � Cost reduction / low maintenance
(maintenance for one) � Small installation space
Emergency stop
Operation
SLS (safely-limited speed) function
When an operator enters the limit area while a system is operating, operation of the system is not stopped and continues with a reduced speed. The motor speed is calculated without using an encoder. This will contribute to wire and cost savings.
Several conditions must be met to use this function. For details of operating conditions and risk assessment, refer to the Instruction Manual (Functional Safety).
For details including other safety monitoring functions, refer to the Instruction Manual (Functional Safety).
FR-E800 *1: One MC is required to shut off the power at an activation of the protective function.
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Stop area
Light curtain
Area sensor
Limit area
Limit area 1 (speed reduction) Limit area 2 (further speed reduction)
21
5
Operation
Energy saving
Use of induction motors or PM motors contributes to energy saving.
Energy saving with motors
PM motor
The PM motor achieves even higher efficiency as compared to the general-purpose motor. The setting for driving PM motors is enabled just by setting parameters.
Why is a PM motor so efficient? � No current flows to the rotor (secondary side), and no secondary
copper loss is generated. � Magnetic flux is generated with permanent magnets, and less
motor current is required.
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Genermalo-ptourrpose
[Comparison of motor losses] * Example of 22 kW motors
higIPhP-Mreefmmficiouietmonrcy
22
Supporting step-by-step energy saving solution
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Compatibility with both induction motors and PM motors
Further energy saving operation is enabled by using IE3/IE4 induction motors or permanent magnet embedded (PM) motors. FR-E800 inverters support both induction motors and PM motors, enabling step-by-step replacement of existing devices. Users can replace inverters first and then motors. There is no need to replace them all at once.
Equipment investment in stages
1st Step
First, replace inverters.
Update complete
FR-E700
FR-E800
FR-E800
Operation
General-purpose motor
General-purpose motor
PM motor
2nd Step
Next, replace motors.
Energy saving with inverters
Advanced optimum excitation control
A large starting torque can be provided with the same motor efficiency under Optimum excitation control. Without the need of troublesome adjustment of parameters (acceleration/deceleration time, torque boost, etc.), acceleration is done in a short time. Also, energy saving operation with the utmost improved motor efficiency is performed during constant-speed operation. When Advanced magnetic flux vector control is selected, Advanced optimum excitation control is available.
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Energy saving monitoring
The energy saving effect can be checked using an operation panel, output terminal, or network. The output power amount measured by the inverter can be output in pulses. The cumulative power amount can be easily checked.*1
*1: This function cannot be used as a meter to certify electricity billings.
Energy saving with the regenerative option
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Power regeneration function (optional)
[Power regeneration]
Regenerative energy
While the motor rotates to drive the machine during power driving, the machine
rotates the motor during regenerative driving, which results in energy saving since
the motor serves as a generator which returns the power to the power supply.
By using the multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC) as a common
converter, the power returned from an inverter during regenerative drive can be
Power supply
supplied to another inverter, which in turn saves energy.
Regeneration
Inverter
Motor
Only the FR-XC in power regeneration mode is available for the FR-E800-SCE.
converter
23
6
Maintenance
Improved maintainability
Functions for residual life diagnosis, predictive maintenance, and preventive maintenance support stable system operation.
Control circuit capacitor
Cooling fan
Main circuit capacitor
Metal corrosion sensor
Fault contact relay (A, B, and C contacts)
Power module
Example: FR-E840-3.7K
Real-time monitoring for early fault detection
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Load characteristics fault detection function
When a mechanical fault such as clogging of the filter occurs, the inverter outputs a warning or shuts off the output to prevent system damage. The speed�torque characteristic is stored while no fault occurs, enabling comparison between the measured data and the stored data.
Torque Torque 5
Torque 4 Torque 3 Torque 2 Torque 1
High load range
Poor rotation (high load)
Light load range
Fault detection width
Fault detection width Fault warning Replacement
Excessively fast rotation (light load)
Minimum frequency
Frequency Frequency Frequency range 1/4 range 1/2 range 3/4
Output Maximum frequency frequency
Normal operation (appropriate)
OK
24
Supporting scheduled maintenance planning
Environmental impact diagnosis function
The world's first*1 "Corrosive-Attack-Level Alert System (CALASTM)"*2 makes it possible to identify signs of inverter damage caused by corrosive gas such as hydrogen sulfide*3. This function notifies operators when factors such as the production environment need to be improved, resulting in reduction in the equipment downtime (for coated models (-60/-06) only). The combined resistance of multiple metal corrosion sensors is measured to detect the level of degree of metal part corrosion caused by corrosive gas in the air.
*1: According to our investigation as of September 10, 2019. *2: Patent applied for.
Alert system for the risk of corrosive damage (degree of corrosion) of electrical equipment *3: Others will be supported in future.
Resistor
Resistor
Thin metal film
E800
E800-E
Sewage treatment plant
Combined resistance Sensor 2 broken
E800-SCE
Metal corrosion sensor 1
Metal corrosion sensor 2
Schematic diagram of the metal corrosion sensor
Sensor 1 broken
Time
Example resistance value change detected by metal corrosion sensors
Maintenance
Enhanced life diagnosis function
Availability of life diagnosis checks is extended as compared to the FR-E700 series. This enhanced diagnosis function ensures reliable operation of the system. The design life of cooling fans and capacitors has been extended to 10 years*4.
*4: Surrounding air temperature: annual average 40�C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt) Output current: 80% of the inverter ND rating Since the design life is a calculated value, it is not a guaranteed value.
Extended
� Main circuit capacitor residual-life estimation (available during operation)
� Inverter fault contact relay (A, B, and C contacts) life diagnosis*5
� Display power cycle life diagnosis
� Main circuit capacitor life diagnosis � Control circuit capacitor life diagnosis � Cooling fan life diagnosis � Inrush current limit circuit life diagnosis
*5: Terminals A, B, and C of the inverter
Supporting preventive maintenance of peripherals
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Maintenance timer
The Maintenance timer signal is output when the inverter's cumulative energization time reaches the time period set with the parameter. This can be used as a guide for when the maintenance of the equipment should be conducted.
Thorough customer support
FA Center network
Our global network offers reliable technical support and customer satisfaction. (Refer to page 136.)
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Setup information web page Our setup information web page provides easy access to manuals, videos, and outline dimension drawings. (Refer to page 32.)
25
7
Maintenance
Downtime reduction
When a fault occurs, AI analysis and other diagnosis functions solve the problem quickly.
Streamlining the installation process
Compatible installation size
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
The installation size was determined to assure exchangeability with the FR-E700 series. Installation interchange attachment options are available for facilitating replacement with the models of different size. (The depth required for installation increases by 12 mm. Refer to page 87 for the details.)
Quick reaction to troubles
Power supply from USB port
E800
E800-E
E800-SCE
With the power supplied from the computer (USB bus power connection)*1, parameters can be set using FR Configurator2 while the main circuit power supply is OFF. Maintenance can be performed quickly and safely.
*1: The maximum SCCR should be 500 mA. A PU connector cannot be used during USB bus power connection.
No power supply
Easy and fast wiring
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Control circuit terminal
� Spring clamp terminals have been adopted for control circuit terminals for easy wiring.
Furthermore, wires can be protected against loosening or contact faults due to vibrations during operation on a bogie or
during transport. No additional screw tightening is required.
FR-E800
FR-E800-E FR-E800-SCE
� The removable control circuit terminal block facilitates
Input terminal
7
2
0
replacement with a new one.
Output Open collector
2
0
0
terminal Relay
1
1
1
26
Troubleshooting supported by AI technology
E800
AI fault diagnosis
The inverter is connected to the engineering software FR Configurator2 (USB/Ethernet connection). Maisart*1 (Mitsubishi Electric's AI technology) is integrated in the software to analyze data and help identify the cause of a fault*2 (this function is enabled during speed control). This function enables the fastest troubleshooting procedure without requiring any special skills, which contributes to downtime reduction.
*1: Maisart is Mitsubishi Electric's brand of AI technology. The name stands for "Mitsubishi Electric's AI creates the State-of-the-ART in technology". This means that it is using our proprietary AI technology to make everything smarter.
*2: Diagnosable faults: Overcurrent trip and overvoltage trip (other faults will be supported in the future.)
E800-E E800-SCE
STEP1
Fault occurs
Input: parameters, waveform data
STEP2
Fault diagnosis
STEP3
Fault cause
AI fault diagnosis result screen
Example: E.OC1 (Overcurrent trip during acceleration)
Maintenance
Trouble analysis from a remote location
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Trace function
Clock function
The operating status (output frequency or other data) immediately before the protective function is activated can be stored in a data file. Users can read the data file in FR Configurator2 for graph display or send it by e-mail to someone away from the worksite, which facilitates the trouble analysis.
Setting the time*1 enables the user to specify the protective function activation time. The date and time are also saved with the trace data, making the fault analysis easier. Time synchronization via CC-Link IE TSN communication is available for the Ethernet model. It is possible to synchronize the internal clocks of the devices that comprise the CC-Link IE TSN communication.
*1: The clock does not run while the control circuit power is OFF. The clock needs to be set every time after turning ON the inverter power. By using the real-time clock function with the optional LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) (when using battery), the clock keeps running even when the control power supply is turned OFF.
USB or Ethernet connection
27
8
Engineering tools
Engineering software for further ease of operation
The work efficiency can be improved for each of the design, operation, and maintenance processes.
FR Configurator2 for further ease of operation
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Using FR Configurator2, easy-to-use software assisting anything from setup to maintenance, much more useful functions are available for users.
Free trial version Functions
The function with the marking above is available in the free trial version (usable free of charge with limited functions). It can be downloaded at Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website.
Function
Free trial version
Function
Free trial version
Parameter list
I/O terminal monitor
�
Safety parameter setting (FR-E800-SCE)
Convert Developer
�
Diagnosis AI fault diagnosis
�
USB memory
�
parameter copy file edit
Graph
�
Ethernet parameter setting
Batch monitor
�
iQSS backup file conversion
Test operation
Help
A full functional trial version, which has the same functionality as the release version, is also offered for a limited period of 30 days.
: Supported � : Not supported : To be supported
Life diagnosis check Free trial version Functions
Parts service life data is displayed in a dedicated window. A warning icon is shown in the alarm field of the parts recommended for replacement. This can be used as a guideline to replace long life parts.
Graph function--trace function
Waveform graph data immediately before the protective function is activated can be automatically obtained. Graph display and log analysis are available using the stored trace data.
Ethernet parameter setting Free trial version Functions
Inverters in the same subnet mask are automatically detected, supporting easy network setting.
1) Detect supported devices.
2) Enter the network No., station No., IP address, and subnet mask.
Setting complete
Diagnostics (Fault history)
Fault records in the inverter can be displayed. When the clock function or CC-Link IE TSN communication is used, the time of fault occurrence can be displayed, too. It is possible to check the occurrence time and the type of faults, which is helpful in identifying causes of faults.
28
Further facilitating operation with your smartphone
E800
Setup information web page
Users can scan the QR code on the product to directly access the setup information. Manuals, setup videos, and outline dimension drawings are available. (Refer to page 32.)
E800-E E800-SCE
Mobile app
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Wireless access with inverters from a remote location enables setting or changing of parameters, starting and stopping, and monitoring on the screen of mobile devices. Users can easily monitor the inverter operation by checking data such as the running frequency and status of input and output terminals at a glance in one screen. Wireless communication equipment must be prepared in the system that includes the inverter.
Operating status
Recognize inverters
Set Parameters
Check the fault history
Monitor
Download the free app now
Engineering tools
29
8
Engineering tools
Engineering software for further ease of operation
The work efficiency can be improved for each of the design, operation, and maintenance processes.
Further facilitating operation with Drive System
E800
Sizing Software Motorizer
Users can select motors by entering data of mechanical configuration, specifications, and operating patterns. Applicable combinations include inverters, sensorless servo drive units, and AC servo amplifiers. The most suitable combination can be selected from the selection result. The software also supports multi-axis systems. Twelve types of load mechanism such as a ball screw or a rack and pinion are selectable. Selection is available by following the steps from 1 to 3. When users include the power regeneration common converter or other applicable converter, the capacity of the converter can be selected at the same time.
Navigation Specification input
E800-E E800-SCE
12 types of load mechanism Addition of transmission structures available
Selection result Applicable combinations
Further facilitating operation with the selection guide software
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Advanced search for optimum inverters is available. Users can select inverters by entering data such as the motor capacity and current value and specifying specifications. The time spent on inverter selection can be reduced.
Axis selection Item selection
Conditions for selection
Applicable models
Selection result
Applicable models will change in real time according to changes made to entries. Users do not have to fill all fields for selection. Applicable models will be selected according to the data entered.
Users can select the items to enter to set conditions for selection by folding or unfolding windows. Both easy setting and detailed setting are available.
Users can select one of the applicable models to register it as the selection result.
Further facilitating operation with Edgecross
Inverters and the system are integrated by maximizing the use of production data with edge computing, enabling solutions for various issues including productivity improvement and equipment maintenance.
� Integration and processing of data sent from various devices and systems in production lines
� Real-time feedback to production sites � Monitoring of field devices based on the know-how of
production sites
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
IT system
Cloud IT system
On-premise
Mobile
Others
Edge computing
Edge application
Operation monitoring
Preventive maintenance
Data analysis
AI
Interface
Real-time data processing
Plug-in
Data model management
MQTT OPC UA Other protocols
Interface
IT gateway
Security
Software for development
SDK DDK GDK
FA (Production site)
Interface
CC-Link IE EtherNet/IP EtherCAT PROFINET MTConnect Data collector
OPC
Other protocols
Processing machine, conveyor machine, filling machine, packaging machine, pick-and-place machine, etc.
30
Further facilitating operation with GOT interaction functions
Enhanced compatibility between inverters and the GOT (human machine interface) brings various benefits to users. Connection with the GOT2000 series can be established just by setting the station number. Other necessary settings are automatically done.
E800
E800-E E800-SCE
Less time spent on screen design work by importing sample screens
Various sample screens*1 are available to enable parameter setting, batch monitor, measurement of load characteristics and so on using the GOT. Using sample screens enables easy startup of the system.
*1: Sample screens are included in the GT Works3 package, or can be downloaded at Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website. Sample screens are available for FR-E800 and FR-E800-E. FR-E800-SCE is to be supported.
STEP 1
Select the GOT and the inverter and connect them.
Connection type selectable (Ethernet or RS-485)
GOT2000
FR-E800
STEP 2
Sample screens for selected connection type available to be imported to user's project data
Sample screen
STEP 3
Transfer the project data to the GOT.
Transfer Complete
GOT2000
FR-E800
Improving work efficiency without using a computer
Before
Do I have to go to the control panel just to check something trivial?
After
Users can use the GOT to set up,
MELSEC
adjust, and perform maintenance for
inverters without using a computer.
MELSEC
Users do not want to go to the control panel or use a computer to check the operation.
1 Instead on the control panel, users can check data on a GOT. 2 Multiple inverters can monitored using the target station switching function.
Immediate warning of system errors
By storing the data of relationship between the output frequency and the torque during normal inverter operation, users can judge whether the load is operating in normal condition. By outputting out-of-range warnings if applicable, users can detect mechanical faults or perform maintenance.
Before
Is it possible to detect a clogged filter or pipe?
After
Trend of failure monitored by the inverter to give a warning
Users want to detect system errors using the inverter to facilitate maintenance.
1 System errors such as clogged filter/pipe can be detected. 2 Operation of the system can be monitored constantly.
Reducing downtime by interacting with the GOT
Faults occurred in the inverter can be displayed on the GOT screen. When a fault occurs, it is possible to identify the cause immediately, which contributes to downtime reduction.
Before
What is the meaning of this fault number?
After
Users want to identify causes of faults easily.
1 Fault records can be checked quickly (last eight faults). 2 Troubleshooting pages of manuals can be displayed.
Engineering tools
31
Scan the QR code to
E800
E800-E
E800-SCE
open the setup information web page
Scan the QR code to check how to use the product or browse manuals.
Installation and wiring Basic operation
Faults
Inquiries
Videos [In preparation]
Examples
Outline dimension drawing
FAQ
32
Dependable quality
Uniformity and consistency
The FR-E800 series product line offers more than fifty different designs. To integrate the unity of design, development of FR-E800 inverters started in accordance with common rules. They can be distinguished at a glance by their uniform characteristics of the details such as the bevel under the operation panel and the parting lines. Consistency with other Mitsubishi Electric FA products is also considered so that all the products look well-organized when they are placed together.
Unity of design for all models
Prototype design / operation test
Detailed examination of the product design (development material)
Pursuing ease of operation
With the user-friendly design, ease of use is pursued for various installation and operating conditions (such as height of the device and operation with or without gloves). Owing to the contrast of colors and flat structure, tile buttons and the LED display are clear and easy to see.
33
Application examples
1 CASE
Smart factory
Problem
It is difficult to monitor the operating condition of the equipment due to the diversified.
Solution
The inverter supports various industrial networks. It is possible to select the inverter according to the existing network.
Multi-protocols
Users can select a group of protocols that includes CC-Link IE TSN, MODBUS/TCP, PROFINET, EtherNet/IP, and EtherCAT suitable for the intended system. It is possible to switch between protocols only by setting parameters. (Supported protocols differ depending on the product model.)
2 CASE
Fans
Standard Ethernet communication (HTTP, FTP etc.)
MELSEC
Programmable controller
Remote I/O Inverter
HMI
Problem
Is it possible to solve ventilation fan problems quickly?
Solution
AI-based troubleshooting reduces equipment downtime. The world's first environmental impact diagnosis function or other self-diagnostics allow early prevention or prediction of faults of the inverter or peripheral devices.
AI fault diagnosis
By connecting the inverter and a computer (USB or Ethernet), users can use FR Configurator2 to analyze data and help identify the cause of a fault. This diagnosis function enables the fastest troubleshooting procedure without requiring any special skills.
Vision sensor Barcode reader
Problem
Is it possible to operate multiple fans together in the same duct?
Solution
Settings are available to select the stopping method to prevent each fan from being affected by other fans and the restarting method after instantaneous power failure.
Stop selection
MELSEC
The inverter can be set to coast the motor to a stop when multiple fans are used in the same duct to prevent each fan from being affected by rotation of other fans.
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
The frequency search is available at every start, enabling smooth starting even when the motor is coasting at a start.
34
3 CASE
Transfer system
Problem
Is it possible to simplify the electric control system to use a smaller enclosure?
Solution
Inverter operations can be freely customized using the PLC function in the inverter.
This function enables construction of various
Extruding machine Output (Y1)
systems without using another controller.
Input (X2)
Stop sensor
Input (X1)
Deceleration sensor
PLC function
In accordance with the machine specifications, users can set
Input (X0) Start sensor Workpiece Output (Y0)
Workpiece
various operation patterns: inverter movements at signal inputs, signal outputs at particular inverter statuses, and
Conveyor robot
monitor outputs, etc. Operation of the system can be
customized by the inverter alone.
Power supply
Motor
4 CASE
Food processing line
Problem
Is it possible to increase productivity while ensuring the safety of operators?
Solution
The inverter supports the IEC 61508-5-2 functional safety standard. This will significantly reduce time required for maintenance or tooling and eliminate external devices such as ones used for monitoring the speed.
SLS (safely-limited speed) function
It is possible to continue operation at a safe speed without stopping the production line. The motor speed is calculated based on the current value or other data without using an encoder. This will contribute to wire and cost savings.
Stop area Light curtain
MELSEC
Area sensor
Limit area
Limit area 1 (speed reduction) Limit area 2 (further speed reduction)
5 CASE
Cutting machine
Problem
Is it possible to reduce variation in the finished products?
Solution
Using PM sensorless vector control, the inverter contributes to reducing variation caused by uneven rotation.
PM sensorless vector control
The speed and magnetic pole positions, the two essential bits of information to control a PM motor, are detected without a sensor (encoder). The speed detection internally-performed in an inverter enables highly accurate control of a PM motor, almost as accurate as an AC servo system, without the need of a sensor (encoder).
Speed fluctuation ratio: �0.05% (digital input) Speed fluctuation ratio = (Speed under no load - Speed under rated load)/Rated speed � 100(%)
Sensorless PM motor
Grinding wheel Workpiece
35
Application examples
6 CASE
Sprinkler
Problem
Is it possible to reduce the amount of water except for daytime hours?
Solution
The inverter has the PLC function to change its operation according to the weather or time of day.
PLC function
The inverter can be run in accordance with a sequence program. Inverter control such as inverter operations triggered by input signals, signal output based on inverter operation status, and monitor output can be freely customized based on the machine specifications.
7 CASE
Food processing machine
Problem
Is it difficult to avoid sudden system failures due to corrosion even when the inverter with circuit board coating is used?
Solution
Using the environmental impact diagnosis function, it is possible to estimate the degree of circuit board corrosion. This enables timely preventive maintenance to reduce the equipment downtime.
Environmental impact diagnosis function
The detection circuit makes it possible to identify signs of inverter damage caused by corrosive gas (hydrogen sulfide). Equipment downtime will be reduced as the function notifies operators when the production environment needs to be improved (for coated models (-60/-06) only). No external instrument is needed to estimate the degree of corrosion in the inverter installation environment.
8 CASE
Automotive production line
Problem
Is it possible to set up or update the network easily?
Solution
Two Ethernet ports are provided as standard, enabling flexible connection in line topology without using a switching hub. Complex networks can be created just by connecting devices with a cable to a free port.
Line topology
The total wiring length can be minimized for large or extensive systems. Eliminating a switching hub allows more flexible installation of inverters even in a narrow space.
MELSEC
36
9 CASE
Pump
Problem
Is it possible to integrate the system control functions into the inverter without using another controller?
Solution
Inverter operations can be controlled using the PLC function in the inverter. This function enables construction of systems without using programmable controllers. This will contribute to cost reduction.
PLC function
In accordance with the machine specifications, users can set various operation patterns: inverter movements at signal inputs, signal outputs at particular inverter statuses, and monitor outputs, etc. Operation of the system can be customized by the inverter alone.
37
Differences with the FR-A800 series
Item
FR-E800
FR-A800
V/F control
V/F
Advanced magnetic flux vector control AD MFVC
Control method
Real sensorless vector control Sensorless
Vector control *1
Vector
PM sensorless vector control
PM
Speed control
Control mode
Torque control Position control
(Point table input 7 points)
(Point table input 15 points, pulse train input to the inverter or the FR-A8AL plug-in option, SSCNET III(/H) communication
using the FR-A8NS plug-in option)
Starting torque
Induction motor
PM motor
Output frequency range
Regenerative braking torque Maximum value/ permissible duty*4
*4
Acceleration/deceleration time setting
AD MFVC
AD MFVC
150% 0.5 Hz
200% 0.5 Hz (3.7K or lower), 150% 0.5 Hz (5.5K or higher)
Sensorless
Sensorless
200% 0.3 Hz (3.7K or lower), 150% 0.3 Hz (5.5K or higher)
SLD rating: 120% 0.3 Hz, LD rating: 150% 0.3 Hz, ND rating: 200%*3 0.3 Hz, HD rating: 250%*3 0.3 Hz
PM
PM
50%
0.1K/0.2K���150%, 0.4K/0.75K���100%, 1.5K���50%, 2.2K or higher���20%
High frequency superposition control: 200% (when used with MM-CF, 200% for the 1.5 kW or lower, and 150% for the 2.0 kW or higher) Current synchronization operation: 50% 0.2 to 590 Hz*2 200 V class(ND rating)*5 : 0.4K to 1.5K���150%3%ED, 2.2K/3.7K���100%3%ED, 5.5K/7.5K���100%2%ED, 11K to 22K���20% continuous 400 V class(ND rating)*5 : 0.4K to 7.5K���100%2%ED, 11K to 22K���20% continuous
0 to 3600 s
Individual acceleration/deceleration setting
Up to 2 types
Up to 3 types
Multi-speed
15 speeds
Speed command
Analog Digital
Restart after instantaneous power failure
Contact input Input signal
Pulse train input
Output signal
Open collector output Contact output (1 changeover contact)
0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA Set with the operation panel or parameter unit*7. 4-digit BCD or
16-bit binary (when using the FR-A8AX plug-in option).
0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, 0 to �5 VDC, 0 to �10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA Set with pulse train input, operation panel, or parameter unit. 4-digit
BCD or 16-bit binary (when using the FR-A8AX plug-in option).
Available (frequency search method, reduced voltage method)
FR-E800: 7
FR-E800-E: 2
12
FR-E800-SCE: 0
--
100k pulses/s
FR-E800: 2 5
FR-E800-E, FR-E800-SCE: 0
1
2
Alarm output
Fault code (4-bit) output
Monitor function
Pulse train output Analog output
RS-485 (Mitsubishi inverter protocol) RS-485 (MODBUS�RTU)
CC-Link IE TSN
Built-in communication function*6
CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link IE Field Network Basic MODBUS/TCP
BACnet/IP
EtherNet/IP
EtherCAT
PROFINET
Safety monitoring functions
STO SS1, SLS, SBC, SSM SS2, SOS
Safety communication function
CC-Link IE TSN Safety communication function CIP Safety FSoE PROFIsafe
1 changeover contact (250 VAC 2 A, 30 VDC 1 A), open collector output --
1440 pulses/s, 1 mA (FM type)
-10 to 10 VDC (AM type)
E800
E800-E(FR-E800-EPA/EPB),
E800-SCE(FR-E800-SCEPA/SCEPB) --
E800-E(FR-E800-EPA/EPB),
E800-SCE(FR-E800-SCEPA/SCEPB)
E800-E(FR-E800-EPA), E800-SCE(FR-E800-SCEPA)
To be supported E800-E(FR-E800-EPC), E800-SCE(FR-E800-SCEPC)
E800-E(FR-E800-EPB), E800-SCE(FR-E800-SCEPB)
E800-SCE
--
E800-SCE(FR-E800-SCEPA/SCEPB) E800-SCE(FR-E800-SCEPA)
To be supported E800-SCE(FR-E800-SCEPC)
E800-SCE(FR-E800-SCEPB)
1 changeover contact (230 VAC 0.3 A, 30 VDC 0.3 A), open collector output
1440 pulses/s, 2 mA (FM type) -10 to 10 VDC
0 to 20 mADC (CA type)
FR-A800, FR-A800-GF
FR-A800-GN
FR-A800-GF FR-A800-E FR-A800-E
--
(HMS network option)
(HMS network option)
(HMS network option)
-- -- To be supported -- -- --
38
Item
FR-E800
FR-A800
Removable terminal block
Optional operation panel
Number of connectable plug-in options
Function (computer connection)
USB
Host (USB memory device connection)
USB bus power
Surrounding air temperature
Storage temperature
Used for control circuit terminals
Enclosure surface operation panel (FR-PA07)*7 Parameter unit (FR-PU07(BB))*7 LCD operation panel (FR-LU08)*7
Parameter unit (FR-PU07(BB)) LCD operation panel (FR-LU08)
1
3
--
--
200/400 V class: -20�C to +60�C (Derate the rated current when using the inverter in a temperature exceeding 50�C.)
575 V class: -10�C to +60�C (Derate the rated current when using the inverter in a temperature exceeding 50�C.)
200/400 V class: -10�C to +50�C (rating: LD/ND/HD) -10�C to +40�C (rating: SLD)
575 V class: FR-A860-00090 or lower: -10�C to +40�C (rating: LD/ND/HD) -10�C to +30�C (rating: SLD) FR-A860-00170 to 01080: -10�C to +40�C FR-A860-01440 or higher: -10�C to +50�C (rating: LD/ND) -10�C to +30�C (rating: SLD/HD)
-40�C to +70�C
-20�C to +65�C
*1: Vector control is available when a Vector control compatible option is installed.
Speed
Item Speed control range
FR-E800 1: 1500
FR-A800 1: 1500
control
Speed response
30 Hz
130 Hz
Torque control range
Torque control
Absolute torque accuracy Repeated torque
accuracy
Terminal response
1: 50 �10%
�5% 10 ms
1: 50 �10%
�5% 2 to 3 ms
*2: The upper frequency limit is 400 Hz under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control.
*3: For the 5.5K or higher, the starting torque is initially limited to a level of 150% due to the torque limitation. *4: The amount of regenerative braking torque is the average short-term torque (which varies depending on motor loss)
that is generated when a motor decelerates in the shortest time by itself from the rated speed. It is not continuous regenerative torque. When a motor decelerates from a speed higher than the rated speed, the average deceleration torque decreases. When the regenerative power is large, use an option brake unit. (Not available for 0.1K and 0.2K.) *5: For the regenerative braking torque for the 30K or higher or when the option is connected, refer to the FR-A800 inverter catalog. *6: Refer to the relevant inverter catalog for other available communication functions or communication functions supported by options. *7: The optional operation panel / parameter unit is available for the standard model.
List of inverters by rating
Three-phase 200 V class
Model FR-E820-[]
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1
LD
ND
0.1K
0008
0.2
0.1
0.2K
0015
0.4
0.2
0.4K
0030
0.75
0.4
0.75K
0050
1.1
0.75
1.5K
0080
2.2
1.5
2.2K
0110
3
2.2
3.7K
0175
5.5
3.7
5.5K
0240
7.5
5.5
7.5K
0330
11
7.5
11K
0470
15
11
15K
0600
18.5
15
18.5K
0760
22
18.5
22K
0900
30
22
Three-phase 400 V class
Model FR-E840-[]
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1
LD
ND
0.4K
0016
0.75
0.4
0.75K
0026
1.5
0.75
1.5K
0040
2.2
1.5
2.2K
0060
3
2.2
3.7K
0095
5.5
3.7
5.5K
0120
7.5
5.5
7.5K
0170
11
7.5
11K
0230
15
11
15K
0300
18.5
15
18.5K
0380
22
18.5
22K
0440
30
22
Three-phase 575 V class
Model FR-E860-[]
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1
LD
ND
0.75K
0017
1.5
0.75
1.5K
0027
2.2
1.5
2.2K
0040
3.7
2.2
3.7K
0061
5.5
3.7
5.5K
0090
7.5
5.5
7.5K
0120
11
7.5
Single-phase 200 V class
Model FR-E820S-[]
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1 ND
0.1K
0008
0.1
0.2K
0015
0.2
0.4K
0030
0.4
0.75K
0050
0.75
1.5K
0080
1.5
2.2K
0110
2.2
Overload current rating
LD
120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50�C
ND
150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50�C
*1: The motor capacity indicates the maximum capacity of a 4-pole standard motor driven by all of the inverters in parallel connection. To drive a Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor, use the 200 V class 0.75K inverter for a 1.1 kW motor, or 200/400 V class 2.2K inverter for a 3 kW motor.
39
Lineup
For the details of the lineup, please contact your sales representative.
Model
Standard model
FR-E8 2 0 - 0 . 1 K - 1
Symbol Voltage class
1*1
100 V
2
200 V
4
400 V
6
575 V
Symbol
Structure, functionality
0 Standard model
Symbol 0.1K to 22K 0008 to 0900
Description Inverter ND rated capacity (kW)*2
Inverter ND rated current (A)*3
Symbol Circuit board coating*4 Plated conductor
None Without coating Without plated conductors
-60
With coating
Without plated conductors
-06*5
With coating
With plated conductors
Symbol Voltage specifications
None
Three-phase
S Single-phase 200 V input
Single-phase 100 V input W*1
(double voltage rectification)
Communication / Symbol functional safety specification
Monitoring specification
Rated frequency Control logic (initial setting) (initial status)
-1
RS-485 + SIL2/PLd
Pulse (terminal FM)
60 Hz
-4
RS-485 + SIL2/PLd
Voltage (terminal AM)
50 Hz
-5
RS-485 + SIL2/PLd
Voltage (terminal AM)
60 Hz
Sink logic Source logic
Sink logic
*1: To be released *2: Combination with the specification type -1(-60/-06) or -5 is available.
(When the kW indication is required for the product, purchase the model with a suffix "-5" and change the initial settings with reference to the Instruction Manual. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection) for the switching of the control logic of the inverter, and the Instruction Manual (Function) for the rated frequency.)) *3: Combination with the specification type -4-60, -4-06, -5-60, or -5-06 is available. *4: Compatible with IEC 60721-3-3 3C2. *5: Available for the 11K or higher.
Ethernet model
FR-E8 4 0 - 0 . 4 K E P A
Symbol Voltage class
1*1
100 V
2
200 V
4
400 V
6
575 V
Symbol
Structure, functionality
0 Standard model
Symbol 0.1K to 22K 0008 to 0900
Description Inverter ND rated capacity (kW)*2
Inverter ND rated current (A)*3
Symbol Circuit board coating*5 Plated conductor
None Without coating Without plated conductors
-60
With coating
Without plated conductors
-06*6
With coating
With plated conductors
Symbol Voltage specifications
None
Three-phase
S Single-phase 200 V input
Single-phase 100 V input W*1
(double voltage rectification)
Communication /
Rated frequency Control logic
Symbol functional safety specification Protocol specification*4 (initial setting) (initial status)
EPA
Ethernet + SIL2/PLd
EPB
Ethernet + SIL2/PLd
Protocol group A Protocol group B
60 Hz 50 Hz
Sink logic
Sink logic / Source logic*7
EPC*1
Ethernet + SIL2/PLd
Protocol group C
*1: To be released *2: Combination with the specification type EPA(-60/-06) or EPB(-60/-06) is available. *3: Combination with the specification type EPA-60, EPA-06, EPB-60, or EPB-06 is available. *4: Selectable protocols differ depending on the group.
Protocol group A: CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, MODBUS/TCP, EtherNet/IP, and BACnet/IP Protocol group B: CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, MODBUS/TCP, and PROFINET Protocol group C: EtherCAT *5: Compatible with IEC 60721-3-3 3C2. *6: Available for the 11K or higher. *7: The initial status of the control logic differs depending on the inverter model. Sink logic for the models indicated with the rated capacity (kW) Source logic for the models indicated with the rated current (A)
60 Hz
Sink logic / Source logic*7
40
Safety communication model
FR-E8 4 0 -
0 . 4KSCEPA
Symbol Voltage class
Symbol
Description
Symbol Circuit board coating*5 Plated conductor
1*1
100 V
0.1K to 22K
Inverter ND rated capacity (kW)*2
None Without coating Without plated conductors
2
200 V
0008 to 0900
Inverter ND rated current (A)*3
-60
With coating
Without plated conductors
4
400 V
-06*6
With coating
With plated conductors
6
575 V
Symbol
Structure, functionality
Symbol Voltage specifications None Three-phase
S Single-phase 200 V input
Communication /
Rated frequency
Symbol functional safety specification Protocol specification*4 (initial setting) Control logic*7
SCEPA
Ethernet + SIL3/PLe
Protocol group A
60 Hz
Source logic
0 Standard model 6*1 IP67 models
Single-phase 100 V input W*1
(double voltage rectification)
SCEPB SCEPC*1
Ethernet + SIL3/PLe Ethernet + SIL3/PLe
Protocol group B Protocol group C
50 Hz 50 Hz
Source logic Source logic
*1: To be released *2: Combination with the specification type SCEPA(-60/-06) or SCEPB(-60/-06) is available. *3: Combination with the specification type SCEPA-60, SCEPA-06, SCEPB-60, or SCEPB-06 is available. *4: Selectable protocols differ depending on the group.
Protocol group A: CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, MODBUS/TCP, EtherNet/IP, and BACnet/IP Protocol group B: CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, MODBUS/TCP, and PROFINET Protocol group C: EtherCAT *5: Compatible with IEC 60721-3-3 3C2 *6: Available for the 11K or higher. *7: The control logic is fixed to the source logic.
Capacity table
Three-phase 200 V FR-E820-[](E/SCE) Three-phase 400 V FR-E840-[](E/SCE) Three-phase 575 V FR-E860-[](E/SCE) Single-phase 200 V FR-E820S-[](E/SCE) Single-phase 100 V FR-E810W-[](E/SCE)
0.1K 0008
z � � � � � � 0.1K 0008 z 0.1K 0008 {
0.2K 0015
z � � � � � � 0.2K 0015 z 0.2K 0015 {
0.4K 0030
z 0.4K 0016
z � � � 0.4K 0030 z 0.4K 0030 {
0.75K 0050
z 0.75K 0026
z 0.75K 0017
z 0.75K 0050
z 0.75K 0050
{
1.5K 0080
z 1.5K 0040
z 1.5K 0027
z 1.5K 0080
z � � �
2.2K 0110
z 2.2K 0060
z 2.2K 0040
z 2.2K 0110
z � � �
3.7K 0175
z 3.7K 0095
z 3.7K 0061
z � � � � � �
5.5K 0240
z 5.5K 0120
z 5.5K 0090
z � � � � � �
7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K
0330 0470 0600 0760 0900
z
z
z
z
z
7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K
0170 0230 0300 0380 0440
z
z
z
z
z
7.5K
�
�
�
�
0120
�
�
�
�
z
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
: Released, : To be released, : Not applicable
7.5K or lower has the KC and EAC markings (11K or higher is to be compatible with the markings). For differences between the standard model (E800), Ethernet model (E800-E), and safety communication model (E800-SCE), refer to page 133.
41
Operation Panel
Components of the operation panel
The operation panel cannot be removed from the inverter.
(a)
(b) (c) (d)
(e) (f) (g)
(i)
(j)
(h)
1
(k)
Operation Panel, Operation Steps
No. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)
(i)
(j)
(k) (l) (m) (n)
(n)
Appearance
(l)
(m)
Name
Description
Monitor (4-digit LED)
Shows a numeric value (readout) of a monitor item such as the frequency or a parameter number. (The monitor item can be changed according to the settings of Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776.)
Unit indication
Hz: ON when the actual frequency is monitored. (Blinks when the set frequency is monitored.) A: ON when the current is monitored. (Both "Hz" and "A" are OFF to indicate a value other than the frequency or the current.
Inverter operation mode LED indicator
PU: ON when the inverter is in the PU operation mode. EXT: ON when the inverter is in the External operation mode. (ON when the inverter in the initial setting is powered ON.) NET: ON when the inverter is in the Network operation mode. PU and EXT: ON when the inverter is in the External/PU combined operation mode 1 or 2.
Operation panel mode LED indicator
MON: ON or blinks only when the first, second, or third monitor is displayed. PRM: ON when the operation panel is in the parameter setting mode. The indicator blinks when inverter is in the easy setting mode.
the
Operating status indicator
ON or blinks during inverter running. ON: During forward rotation operation. Blinks slowly (1.4-second cycle): During reverse rotation operation.
Blinks quickly (0.2-second cycle): Operation is disabled although the start command is given.
Controlled motor type LED indicator
ON when the inverter is set to control the PM motor. The indicator blinks during test operation. The indicator is OFF when the inverter controls the induction motor.
PLC
function
LED
indicator
ON when the PLC function
PLC function is valid.)
of
the
inverter
is
valid.
(The
indicator
blinks
when
a
fault
occurs
while
the
Setting dial
The setting dial of the Mitsubishi Electric inverters. Turn the setting dial to change the setting of frequency or parameter, etc. Press the setting dial to perform the following operations: To display a set frequency on the LED display in the monitor mode. (The monitor item shown on the display can be changed by using Pr.992.) To display the present setting during calibration.
PU/EXT key
Switches between the PU operation mode, the PUJOG operation mode, and the External operation mode. The easy setting of the inverter operation mode is enabled by pressing this key simultaneously with the MODE key. Also cancels the PU stop warning.
MODE key
Switches the operation panel to a different mode. The easy setting of the inverter operation mode is enabled by pressing this key simultaneously with the PU/EXT key. Every key on the operation panel becomes inoperable by holding this key for 2 seconds. The key inoperable function is invalid when Pr.161 = "0 (initial setting)".
SET key
Confirms each selection.
When this key is pressed during inverter operation, Initial setting in the monitor mode
the monitor item changes.
Output
(The monitor item on each screen can be changed frequency
according to the settings of Pr.52, Pr.774 to
Output current
Pr.776.)
Output voltage
RUN key
Start command The direction of motor rotation depends on the Pr.40 setting.
STOP/RESET key
Stops the operation commands. Used to reset the inverter when the protective function is activated.
USB connector
FR Configurator2 is available by USB connection.
Situations such as when the MRS/X10 signal is input, during the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, after auto tuning is complete, when "SE" (incorrect parameter setting) alarm occurs.
42
Basic operation of the operation panel
Operation mode switchover/Frequency setting External operation mode*1(displayed at power-ON) PU operation mode*1
Blinking Change the setting.
PU Jog operation mode*1
1
Frequency setting written and complete
Monitor
First screen (Output frequency*2 monitoring)
Second screen (Output current*2 monitoring)
Third screen (Output voltage*2 monitoring)
Operation Panel, Operation Steps
Parameter setting
Parameter clear
PU operation mode
The present setting is displayed.
Change the setting.
All parameter clear
Fault history clear
Blinking Parameter write complete Initial value change list
Group parameter setting Automatic parameter setting
PM initialization*3
(Example) Blinking
(Example) Blinking
(Example) Blinking
Fault history
Fault record 1 *4
Fault record 2 *4
Fault record 10 *4
The last ten fault records can be displayed. When the fault history is empty, only the fault number is displayed.
For the details of operation modes, refer to the Instruction Manual (Function). The monitor item can be changed. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Function).) Not displayed for the 575 V class. For the details of the fault history, refer to the Instruction Manual (Maintenance).
43
Components of the operation panel
The operation panel cannot be removed from the inverter.
1
J
K
L
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Operation Panel, Operation Steps
No. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)
(i)
(j)
(k) (l) (m) (n)
P
Appearance
M
N
O
Name
Description
Monitor (4-digit LED)
Shows a numeric value (readout) of a monitor item such as the frequency or a parameter number. (The monitor item can be changed according to the settings of Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776.)
Unit indication
Hz: ON when the actual frequency is monitored. (Blinks when the set frequency is monitored.) A: ON when the current is monitored. (Both "Hz" and "A" are OFF to indicate a value other than the frequency or the current.
Inverter operation mode LED indicator
PU: ON when the inverter is in the PU operation mode. EXT: ON when the inverter is in the External operation mode. (ON when the inverter in the initial setting is powered ON.) NET: ON when the inverter is in the Network operation mode. PU and EXT: ON when the inverter is in the External/PU combined operation mode 1 or 2.
Operation panel mode LED indicator
MON: ON or blinks only when the first, second, or third monitor is displayed. PRM: ON when the operation panel is in the parameter setting mode. The indicator blinks when inverter is in the easy setting mode.
the
Operating status indicator
ON or blinks during inverter running. ON: During forward rotation operation. Blinks slowly (1.4-second cycle): During reverse rotation operation.
Blinks quickly (0.2-second cycle): Operation is disabled although the start command is given.
Controlled motor type LED indicator
ON when the inverter is set to control the PM motor. The indicator blinks during test operation. The indicator is OFF when the inverter controls the induction motor.
PLC
function
LED
indicator
ON when the PLC function
PLC function is valid.)
of
the
inverter
is
valid.
(The
indicator
blinks
when
a
fault
occurs
while
the
Ethernet communication status
Indicates the Ethernet communication status. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication).
PU/EXT key
MODE key
SET key RUN key STOP/RESET key UP/DOWN key
Switches between the PU operation mode, the PUJOG operation mode, and the External operation mode. The easy setting of the inverter operation mode is enabled by pressing this key simultaneously with the MODE key. Also cancels the PU stop warning.
Switches the operation panel to a different mode. The easy setting of the inverter operation mode is enabled by pressing this key simultaneously with the PU/EXT key. Every key on the operation panel becomes inoperable by holding this key for 2 seconds. The key inoperable function is invalid when Pr.161 = "0 (initial setting)".
Confirms each selection.
When this key is pressed during inverter operation, Initial setting in the monitor mode
the monitor item changes.
Output
(The monitor item on each screen can be changed frequency
according to the settings of Pr.52, Pr.774 to
Output current
Pr.776.)
Output voltage
Start command The direction of motor rotation depends on the Pr.40 setting.
Stops the operation commands. Used to reset the inverter when the protective function is activated.
Used to change the setting of frequency or parameter.
(o)
USB connector
FR Configurator2 is available by USB connection.
Situations such as when the MRS/X10 signal is input, during the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, after auto tuning is complete, when "SE" (incorrect parameter setting) alarm occurs.
44
Basic operation of the operation panel
Operation mode switchover/Frequency setting
Network operation mode*1 (at power-ON)
PU operation mode*1
Blinking Change the setting.
PU Jog operation mode*1
1
Frequency setting written and complete
Monitor
First screen (Output frequency*2 monitoring)
Second screen (Output current*2 monitoring)
Third screen (Output voltage*2 monitoring)
Operation Panel, Operation Steps
Parameter setting
Parameter clear
PU operation mode
The present setting is displayed.
Change the setting.
All parameter clear
Fault history clear
Blinking Parameter write complete Initial value change list
Group parameter setting Automatic parameter setting
PM initialization*3
(Example) Blinking
(Example) Blinking
(Example) Blinking
Fault history
Fault record 1 *4
Fault record 2 *4
Fault record 10 *4
The last ten fault records can be displayed. When the fault history is empty, only the fault number is displayed.
For the details of operation modes, refer to the Instruction Manual (Function). The monitor item can be changed. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Function).) Not displayed for the 575 V class. For the details of the fault history, refer to the Instruction Manual (Maintenance).
45
Operation Steps
: Initial setting
(Hz) Start command
Frequency
Frequency command
Inverter output frequency
ON
Time (S)
1
Start command with on the operation panel (PU)
How to give a frequency
command?
Step of operation
Installation/mounting Refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection) Wiring of the power Refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection) supply and motor
Video for setup and
wiring
Control mode selection Refer to the Instruction Manual (Function)
How to give a start command?
Start command via the PU/Ethernet connector of the inverter and plug-in option (Communication) Initial setting for the Ethernet model
Refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection)
Video for network connection
Connect a switch, relay, etc. to the control circuit terminal block of the inverter to give a start command. (External)
Initial setting for the standard model
How to give a frequency
command?
Operation Panel, Operation Steps
Set from the operation panel
(PU) Refer to the Instruction Manual (Function)
Change frequency with ON/OFF switches connected to terminals (multi-speed setting)
(External)
Refer to the Instruction Manual (Function)
Perform frequency setting by a voltage output device (Connection across terminals 2 and 5)
(External)
Refer to the Instruction Manual (Function)
Perform frequency setting by a current output device (Connection across terminals 4 and 5)
(External)
Refer to the Instruction Manual (Function)
Video for operation using the operation panel
Set from the operation panel
(PU) Refer to the Instruction Manual (Function)
Change of frequency with ON/OFF switches connected to terminals (multi-speed setting)
(External)
Refer to the Instruction Manual (Function)
Perform frequency setting by a voltage output device (Connection across terminals 2 and 5)
(External)
Refer to the Instruction Manual (Function)
Perform frequency setting by a current output device (Connection across terminals 4 and 5)
(External)
Refer to the Instruction Manual (Function)
Video for operation using
the switches
For more information on the product
46
Parameter list
For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial values of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter's setting, change and check can be made on the operation panel.
NOTE
� Simple indicates simple mode parameters. Use Pr.160 User group read selection to indicate the simple mode parameters only (initial
setting is to indicate the extended mode parameters). � The changing of the parameter settings may be restricted in some operating statuses. Use Pr.77 Parameter write selection to change the
setting of the restriction. � Refer to for instruction codes for communication and availability of Parameter clear, all clear, and Parameter copy.
Notation
[E800]: Available for the standard model. [E800-1]: Available for the FM type inverter (standard model).
[E800-4]: Available for the AM (50 Hz) type inverter (standard model).
[E800-5]: Available for the AM (60 Hz) type inverter (standard model).
[E800(-E)]: Available for the standard and Ethernet models.
[E800-(SC)E]: Available for the Ethernet model.
[E800-SCE]: Available for the safety communication model.
[E800-(SC)EPA]: Available for the Protocol group A (Ethernet model). [E800-(SC)EPB]: Available for the Protocol group B (Ethernet model).
2
[200/400 V class]: Available for the 200/400 V class. [575 V class]: Available for the 575 V class inverters. [3-phase]: Available for the three-phase power input model.
Parameter list
Parameter initial value groups
� Initial values of parameters of the FR-E800 differ depending on the parameter initial value group. In this Instruction Manual, Gr.1 indicates the parameter initial value group 1, and Gr.2 indicates the parameter initial value group 2.
� FR-E800 inverters are divided into two groups as shown in the following table.
Parameter initial value groups
Model
Specification
FR-E800-1
RS-485 communication, terminal FM
Group 1 (Gr.1)
FR-E800-5
RS-485 communication, terminal AM
FR-E800-(SC)EPA
Ethernet communication (Protocol group A)
Group 2 (Gr.2)
FR-E800-4 FR-E800-(SC)EPB
RS-485 communication, terminal AM Ethernet communication (Protocol group B)
Function Pr. Pr. group
Name
Setting range
Basic function
0
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
8
9 10 11
12
-- 13 -- 14
15 16 -- 17
G000 Torque boost Simple
0% to 30%
H400 H401 G001 D301
D302
D303
F010
Maximum frequency Simple Minimum frequency Simple Base frequency Simple Multi-speed setting (high speed) Simple Multi-speed setting (middle speed) Simple Multi-speed setting (low speed) Simple
Acceleration time Simple
0 to 120 Hz 0 to 120 Hz 0 to 590 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
0 to 590 Hz
0 to 590 Hz
0 to 3600 s
F011
H000 C103 G100 G101
Deceleration time Simple
0 to 3600 s
Electronic thermal O/L relay Simple Rated motor current Simple
0 to 500 A
DC injection brake operation frequency 0 to 120 Hz
DC injection brake operation time
0 to 10 s, 8888
G110
DC injection brake operation voltage 0% to 30%
F102 G003 D200
F002
T720
Starting frequency Load pattern selection Jog frequency
Jog acceleration/deceleration time
MRS/X10 terminal input selection
0 to 60 Hz 0 to 3 0 to 590 Hz
0 to 3600 s
0 to 5
DC injection brake
JOG operation
Minimum Initial value
setting increments
Gr.1
Gr.2
0.1%
6% 5% 4% 3% 2%
0.01 Hz
120 Hz
0.01 Hz
0 Hz
0.01 Hz
60 Hz 50 Hz
Customer setting
0.01 Hz
60 Hz 50 Hz
0.01 Hz
30 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.01 A 0.01 Hz 0.1 s
0.1%
0.01 Hz 1 0.01 Hz 0.1 s 1
10 Hz
5 s 10 s 15 s 5 s 10 s 15 s
Inverter rated current
3 Hz 0.5 s 6% 4% 2%
1%
0.5 Hz 0 5 Hz
0.5 s
0
47
Function Pr.
-- 18 -- 19
20
Pr. group
Name
H402 G002
F000
High speed maximum frequency Base frequency voltage Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency
Setting range
0 to 590 Hz 0 to 1000 V, 8888, 9999
Minimum Initial value
setting increments
Gr.1
Gr.2
0.01 Hz
120 Hz
0.1 V
9999 8888
1 to 590 Hz
0.01 Hz
60 Hz 50 Hz
Customer setting
setting prevention deceleration time
Acceleration/
21
F001
Acceleration/deceleration time increments
0, 1
1
0
Multi-speed Stall
22
H500
Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level)
0% to 400%
0.1%
23
H610
Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed
0% to 200%, 9999
0.1%
150% 9999
2
24 to 27
D304 to D307
Multi-speed setting (speed 4 to speed 7) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
9999
Parameter list
Frequency jump
Frequency detection
Second function
-- 29
-- 30
31 32 33 34 35 36 -- 37 -- 40 41 42 43
44
45 46 47 48 51
52
53
54 55 56 57
58
-- 59 -- 60
F100
E300
H420 H421 H422 H423 H424 H425 M000 E202 M441 M442 M443
F020
F021 G010 G011 H600 H010 C203
M100
M003
M300 M040 M041 A702
A703
F101 G030
Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection
Regenerative function selection
Frequency jump 1A Frequency jump 1B Frequency jump 2A Frequency jump 2B Frequency jump 3A Frequency jump 3B Speed display RUN key rotation direction selection Up-to-frequency sensitivity Output frequency detection
0 to 2
[E800(-E)] 0 to 2 [E800-SCE] 0, 1 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 to 9998 0, 1 0% to 100% 0 to 590 Hz
Output frequency detection for reverse rotation
0 to 590 Hz, 9999
1
1
0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.001 1 0.1% 0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
Second acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600 s
0.1 s
Second deceleration time
0 to 3600 s, 9999
0.1 s
Second torque boost
0% to 30%, 9999
0.1%
Second V/F (base frequency)
0 to 590 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
Second stall prevention operation level 0% to 400%, 9999
0.1%
Second electronic thermal O/L relay Rated second motor current
0 to 500 A, 9999
0.01 A
[E800][E800-(SC)EPB]
0, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 23 to
33, 35, 38, 40 to 42, 44,
45, 50 to 57, 61, 62, 64,
Operation panel main monitor selection
65, 67, 91, 97, 100 [E800-(SC)EPA]
1
0, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 23 to
33, 35, 38, 40 to 42, 44,
45, 50 to 57, 61, 62, 64,
65, 67, 83, 91, 97, 100
Frequency / rotation speed unit switchover
0, 1, 4
1
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21, FM terminal function selection [E800-1] 24, 32, 33, 50, 52, 53, 61, 1
62, 65, 67, 70, 97
Frequency monitoring reference
0 to 590 Hz
0.01 Hz
Current monitoring reference
0 to 500 A
0.01 A
Restart coasting time
0, 0.1 to 30 s, 9999
0.1 s
Restart cushion time
0 to 60 s
0.1 s
Remote function selection
0 to 3, 11 to 13
1
Energy saving control selection
0, 9
1
0
0
9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 1800 0 10% 6 Hz 9999 5 s 10 s 15 s 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999
0
0
1
60 Hz 50 Hz Inverter rated current 9999
1 s
0 0
Monitoring
Automatic restart
48
Automatic acceleration/deceleration
Function Pr. Pr. group
Name
61
F510
Reference current
62
F511
Reference value at acceleration
Setting range 0 to 500 A, 9999 0% to 400%, 9999
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Gr.1 Gr.2
Customer setting
0.01 A
9999
1%
9999
Retry
63
F512
Reference value at deceleration
0% to 400%, 9999
1%
9999
-- 65
H300 Retry selection
0 to 5
1
0
-- 66
H611
Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency
0 to 590 Hz
0.01 Hz
60 Hz 50 Hz
67
H301 Number of retries at fault occurrence 0 to 10, 101 to 110
1
0
68
H302 Retry waiting time
0.1 to 600 s
0.1 s
1 s
69 -- 70
H303 G107
Retry count display erase Special regenerative brake duty
0 0% to 100%
1
0
0.1%
0%
2
Parameter list
-- 71
C100 Applied motor
[200/400 V class]
0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 16,
20, 23, 30, 33, 40, 43, 50,
53, 70, 73, 1800, 1803,
8090, 8093, 9090, 9093 1
0
[575 V class]
0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 16,
30, 33, 8090, 8093, 9090,
9093
-- 72
E600
PWM frequency selection
0 to 15
1
1
-- 73
T000
Analog input selection
0, 1, 6, 10, 11, 16
1
1
-- 74
T002
Input filter time constant
0 to 8
1
1
[E800(-E)]
--
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection
0 to 3, 14 to 17 [E800-SCE] 0 to 3, 14 to 17, 10000 to
10003, 10014 to 10017
[E800(-E)] 14 [E800-SCE] 10014
-- 75
E100
Reset selection
E101
Disconnected PU detection [E800]
0, 1
1
0
E102
PU stop selection
1
E107
Reset limit [E800-SCE]
0, 10 [E800-SCE]
[E800(-E)] 0 [E800-SCE] 10
-- 77
E400
Parameter write selection
0 to 2
1
0
-- 78
D020
Reverse rotation prevention selection 0 to 2
1
0
-- 79
D000 Operation mode selection Simple
0 to 4, 6, 7
1
0
80
C101
Motor capacity
0.1 to 30 kW, 9999
0.01 kW
9999
81
C102 Number of motor poles
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 9999 1
9999
82
C125
Motor excitation current
0 to 500 A, 9999
0.01 A
9999
83
C104 Rated motor voltage
0 to 1000 V
0.1 V
[200 V class] 200 V [400 V class] 400 V [575 V class] 575 V
84
C105 Rated motor frequency
10 to 400 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
9999
89
G932
Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic flux vector)
0% to 200%, 9999
0.1%
9999
90
C120
Motor constant (R1)
0 to 50 , 9999
0.001
9999
91
C121 Motor constant (R2)
0 to 50 , 9999
0.001
9999
92
C122
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld)
0 to 6000 mH, 9999
0.1 mH
9999
93
C123
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq)
0 to 6000 mH, 9999
0.1 mH
9999
94
C124
Motor constant (X)
0% to 100%, 9999
0.1%
9999
95
C111
Online auto tuning selection
0, 1
1
0
96
C110
Auto tuning setting/status
0, 1, 11
1
0
Motor constant
49
Function Pr. Pr. group
Name
Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Gr.1 Gr.2
Customer setting
117
N020
PU communication station number [E800]
0 to 31
1
0
PU connector communication
118
N021 PU communication speed [E800]
48, 96, 192, 384, 576, 768, 1152
1
192
--
PU communication stop bit length / data length [E800]
0, 1, 10, 11
1
119
N022 PU communication data length [E800] 0, 1
1
0
N023
PU communication stop bit length [E800]
0, 1
1
120
N024 PU communication parity check [E800] 0 to 2
1
2
121
N025 PU communication retry count [E800] 0 to 10, 9999
1
1
122
N026
PU communication check time interval [E800]
0, 0.1 to 999.8 s, 9999
0.1 s
0
123
N027
PU communication waiting time setting [E800]
0 to 150 ms, 9999
1 ms
9999
2
124 -- 125
N028 T022
PU communication CR/LF selection [E800] Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency Simple
0 to 2 0 to 590 Hz
1 0.01 Hz
1 60 Hz 50 Hz
Parameter list
-- 126
T042
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency Simple
0 to 590 Hz
0.01 Hz
60 Hz 50 Hz
PID operation
127
A612
PID control automatic switchover frequency
128
A610
PID action selection
129
A613
PID proportional band
130
A614
PID integral time
131
A601
PID upper limit
132
A602
PID lower limit
133
A611
PID action set point
134
A615
PID differential time
0 to 590 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
0, 20, 21, 40 to 43, 50,
51, 60, 61, 1000, 1001, 1010, 1011, 2000, 2001,
1
2010, 2011
0.1% to 1000%, 9999 0.1%
0.1 to 3600 s, 9999
0.1 s
0% to 100%, 9999
0.1%
0% to 100%, 9999
0.1%
0% to 100%, 9999
0.01%
0.01 to 10 s, 9999
0.01 s
9999
0
100% 1 s 9999 9999 9999 9999
PU
145
E103
PU display language selection [E800] 0 to 7
1
--
Current detection
-- 147 150 151 152 153
-- 154 -- 156 -- 157
-- 158
F022 M460 M461 M462 M463 H631 H501 M430
M301
Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency Output current detection level Output current detection signal delay time Zero current detection level Zero current detection time Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation Stall prevention operation selection OL signal output timer
AM terminal function selection [E8004][E800-5]
0 to 590 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
0% to 400%
0.1%
0 to 10 s
0.1 s
0% to 400% 0 to 10 s
0.1% 0.01 s
1, 11
1
0 to 31, 100, 101
1
0 to 25 s, 9999
0.1 s
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 32, 33, 50, 52 to 54, 1 61, 62, 65, 67, 70, 91, 97
9999 150% 0 s 5% 0.5 s 1 0 0 s
1
-- 160
E440
User group read selection Simple
0, 1, 9999
1
0
-- 161 162
E200 A700
Frequency setting/key lock operation selection Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection
0, 1, 10, 11 0, 1, 10, 11
1
0
1
0
Current Automatic detection restart
165
A710
Stall prevention operation level for restart
0% to 400%
0.1%
150%
166 167 -- 168 -- 169 170
M433
M464
E000 E080 E001 E081 M020
Output current detection signal retention time
0 to 10 s, 9999
Output current detection operation selection
0, 1, 10, 11
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Watt-hour meter clear
0, 10, 9999
0.1 s 1
0.1 s 0
1
9999
User Cumulative group monitor
171
M030 Operation hour meter clear
0, 9999
1
9999
172
E441
User group registered display/batch clear
9999, (0 to 16)
1
173
E442
User group registration
0 to 1999, 9999
1
174
E443
User group clear
0 to 1999, 9999
1
0
9999 9999
50
Function Pr. Pr. group
Name
178
T700
STF/DI0 terminal function selection [E800(-E)]
179
T701
STF/DI0 terminal function selection [E800(-E)]
Setting range
Minimum Initial value
setting increments
Gr.1
Gr.2
0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12 to 16,
18, 23 to 27, 30, 37, 42,
43, 46, 47, 50, 51, 60, 62, 1
60
65 to 67, 72, 74, 76, 87 to
89, 92, 9999
0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12 to 16,
18, 23 to 27, 30, 37, 42,
43, 46, 47, 50, 51, 61, 62, 1
61
65 to 67, 72, 74, 76, 87 to
89, 92, 9999
Customer setting
Input terminal function assignment
180
T702
RL terminal function selection
1
0
[E800]
181
T703
RM terminal function selection
0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12 to 16, 1
1
18, 23 to 27, 30, 37, 42,
43, 46, 47, 50, 51, 62, 65
182
T704
RH terminal function selection
to 67, 72, 74, 76, 87 to 89, 92, 9999
1
2
[E800-(SC)E]
2
0 to 4, 8, 13 to 15, 18, 23,
183
T709
MRS terminal function selection
24, 26, 27, 30, 37, 42, 43, 1
24
46, 47, 50, 51, 72, 74, 76,
87 to 89, 92, 9999
[E800]
184
T711
RES terminal function selection
1
62 [E800-(SC)E]
9999
Parameter list
185
T751
NET X1 input selection
186
T752
NET X2 input selection
187
T753
NET X3 input selection
188
T754
NET X4 input selection
1
0 to 4, 8, 13 to 15, 18, 23, 24, 26, 27, 30, 37, 42, 43, 46, 47, 50, 51, 72, 74, 76, 87 to 89, 92, 9999
1 1 1
9999
189
T755
NET X5 input selection
1
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
20, 24 to 26, 30 to 36, 38
190
M400 RUN terminal function selection
to 41, 44 to 48, 56, 57, 60 to 64, 70, 80, 81, 84, 90
1
0
to 93, 95, 96, 98 to 101,
103, 104, 107, 108, 111
to 116, 120, 124 to 126,
130 to 136, 138 to 141,
144 to 148, 156, 157, 160
to 164, 170, 180, 181,
184, 190 to 193, 195,
191
M404 FU terminal function selection
196, 198, 199, 206, 211 to 213, 242 [E800-
1
4
(SC)E], 306, 311 to 313,
342 [E800-(SC)E], 9999
Output terminal function assignment
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
20, 24 to 26, 30 to 36, 38
to 41, 44 to 48, 56, 57, 60
to 64, 70, 80, 81, 82
[E800-(SC)EPA], 84, 90,
91, 95, 96, 98 to 101,
103, 104, 107, 108, 111
to 116, 120, 124 to 126,
192
M405 ABC terminal function selection
130 to 136, 138 to 141, 1
99
144 to 148, 156, 157, 160
to 164, 170, 180, 181,
182 [E800-(SC)EPA],
184, 190, 191, 195, 196,
198, 199, 206, 211 to
213, 242 [E800-(SC)E],
306, 311 to 313, 342
[E800-(SC)E], 9999
193
M451 NET Y1 output selection
194
M452 NET Y2 output selection
195
M453 NET Y3 output selection
196
M454 NET Y4 output selection
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16, 1
20, 24 to 26, 30 to 36, 38
to 41, 44 to 48, 56, 57, 60
to 64, 70, 80, 81, 84, 90
to 93, 95, 98 to 101, 103, 104, 107, 108, 111 to 116,
1
120, 124 to 126, 130 to
136, 138 to 141, 144 to
148, 156, 157, 160 to
164, 170, 180, 181, 184, 190 to 193, 195, 198,
1
199, 206, 211 to 213, 242
[E800-(SC)E], 306, 311
to 313, 342 [E800-
(SC)E], 9999
1
9999 9999 9999 9999
-- 198
E709
Display corrosion level
(1 to 3)
1
1
51
Function Pr. Pr. group
Name
Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Gr.1 Gr.2
Customer setting
Multi-speed setting
232 to 239
D308 to D315
Multi-speed setting (speed 8 to speed 15)
0 to 590 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
9999
-- 240 -- 241 -- 244
245 246
E601 M043 H100 G203 G204
Soft-PWM operation selection Analog input display unit switchover Cooling fan operation selection Rated slip Slip compensation time constant
0, 1 0, 1 0, 1 0% to 50%, 9999 0.01 to 10 s
1 1 1 0.01% 0.01 s
1 0 1 9999 0.5 s
Slip compensation
247
G205
Constant output range slip compensation selection
0, 9999
1
9999
-- 249
H101 Earth (ground) fault detection at start 0, 1
1
0
1
2
-- 250
G106 Stop selection
0 to 100 s, 1000 to 1100 s, 8888, 9999
0.1 s
9999
-- 251
H200 Output phase loss protection selection 0, 1
1
1
255
E700
Life alarm status display
(0 to 879)
1
0
Life check
256
E701
Inrush current limit circuit life display (0% to 100%)
1%
100%
257
E702
Control circuit capacitor life display
(0% to 100%)
1%
100%
258
E703
Main circuit capacitor life display
(0% to 100%)
1%
100%
259
E704
Main circuit capacitor life measuring 0, 1
1
0
-- 260
E602
PWM frequency automatic switchover 0, 10
1
10
Parameter list
Power failure stop
261
A730
Power failure stop selection
0 to 2
1
0
Stop-on-contact control
Brake sequence
-- 267 -- 268 -- 269
270 275
276
277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284
285
286 287 -- 289 -- 290 -- 292
-- 293
-- 295
296
297
-- 298 -- 299
T001 M022 E023 A200 A205
A206
H630 A100 A101 A102 A103 A104 A105 A106 A107 H416 G400
G401
M431 M044 A110 F500 F513
E201
E410
E411
A711 A701
Terminal 4 input selection
0 to 2
Monitor decimal digits selection
0, 1, 9999
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Stop-on-contact control selection
0, 1, 11
Stop-on contact excitation current lowspeed scaling factor
0% to 300%, 9999
PWM carrier frequency at stop-on contact
0 to 9, 9999
Stall prevention operation current switchover
0, 1
Brake opening frequency
0 to 30 Hz
Brake opening current
0% to 400%
Brake opening current detection time 0 to 2 s
Brake operation time at start
0 to 5 s
Brake operation frequency
0 to 30 Hz
Brake operation time at stop
0 to 5 s
Deceleration detection function selection
0, 1
Overspeed detection frequency
Speed deviation excess detection frequency
0 to 30 Hz, 9999
Droop gain
0% to 100%
Droop filter time constant
0 to 1 s
Inverter output terminal filter Monitor negative output selection
5 to 50 ms, 9999 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, 9, 12, 13
Automatic acceleration/deceleration 0, 1, 7, 8, 11
Acceleration/deceleration separate selection Frequency change increment amount setting [E800]
Password lock level
0 to 2
0, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 0 to 6, 99, 100 to 106, 199, 9999
Password lock/unlock
(0 to 5), 1000 to 9998, 9999
Frequency search gain
0 to 32767, 9999
Rotation direction detection selection at restarting
0, 1, 9999
1 1
1 0.1%
1
1 0.01 Hz 0.1% 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.01 Hz 0.1 s 1
0.01 Hz
0.1% 0.01 s 1 ms 1 1
1
0.01
1
1 1 1
0 9999
0 9999
9999
0 3 Hz 130% 0.3 s 0.3 s 6 Hz 0.3 s 0
9999
0% 0.3 s 9999 0 0
0
0
9999
9999 9999 0
Droop control
Password
52
Function Pr. Pr. group
Name
313 M410 DO0 output selection
314 M411 DO1 output selection
315 M412 DO2 output selection
316 M413 DO3 output selection
317 M414 DO4 output selection
CC-Link IE
318 M415 DO5 output selection
319 M416 DO6 output selection
Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Gr.1 Gr.2
Customer setting
1
9999
1
9999
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
20, 24 to 26, 30 to 36, 38
to 41, 44 to 48, 56, 57, 60
to 64, 70, 80, 81, 84, 90 1
9999
to 93, 95, 96, 98 to 101,
103, 104, 107, 108, 111
to 116, 120, 124 to 126,
130 to 136, 138 to 141, 1
9999
144 to 148, 156, 157, 160
to 164, 170, 180, 181,
184, 190 to 193, 195,
196, 198, 199, 206, 211 1
9999
to 213, 242 [E800(SC)E], 306, 311 to 313,
2
342 [E800-(SC)E], 9999
1
9999
1
9999
Parameter list
RS-485 communication
Encoder feedback
320 M420 RA1 output selection 321 M421 RA2 output selection 322 M422 RA3 output selection
1
0
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
20, 24 to 26, 30 to 36, 38
to 41, 44 to 48, 56, 57, 60
to 64, 70, 80, 81, 84, 90, 1
1
91, 95, 96, 98, 99, 206,
211 to 213, 242 [E800-
(SC)E], 9999
1
4
338
D010
Communication operation command source
0, 1
1
0
339
D011
Communication speed command source
0 to 2
1
0
340
D001 Communication startup mode selection 0, 1, 10
[E800]
1
0 [E800-(SC)E]
10
342
N001
Communication EEPROM write selection
0, 1
1
0
343
N080 Communication error count [E800]
(0 to 999)
1
0
-- 349 N010 Communication reset selection
0, 1
1
0
359 C141 Encoder rotation direction
100, 101
1
101
367 G240 Speed feedback range
0 to 590 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
9999
368 G241 Feedback gain
0 to 100
0.1
1
369 C140 Number of encoder pulses
2 to 4096
1
1024
374
H800 Overspeed detection level
0 to 590 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
9999
375
H801 Faulty acceleration rate detection level 0 to 400 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
9999
376 C148
Encoder signal loss detection enable/ disable selection
0, 1
1
0
-- 390
N054
% setting reference frequency [E800(SC)EPA]
1 to 590 Hz
0.01 Hz
60 Hz --
414
A800
PLC function operation selection
0 to 2, 11, 12
1
0
415
A801
Inverter operation lock mode setting 0, 1
1
0
420
B001
Command pulse scaling factor numerator (electronic gear numerator)
1 to 32767
1
1
Command pulse multiplication
421
B002
denominator (electronic gear
denominator)
1 to 32767
1
1
422
B003
Position control gain
0 to 150 s-1
1 s-1
10 s-1
423
B004
Position feed forward gain
0% to 100%
1%
0%
425
B006
Position feed forward command filter 0 to 5 s
0.001 s
0 s
426
B007
In-position width
0 to 32767 pulses
1 pulse
100 pulses
427
B008
Excessive level error
0 to 400k pulses, 9999 1k pulses 40k pulses
430
B011
Pulse monitor selection
0 to 5, 100 to 105, 1000 to 1005, 1100 to 1105, 1 8888, 9999
9999
442
N620
Default gateway address 1 [E800(SC)E]
443 444
N621 N622
Default gateway address 2 [E800(SC)E] Default gateway address 3 [E800(SC)E]
0 to 255
1
0
445
N623
Default gateway address 4 [E800(SC)E]
53
PLC
Position control
Ethernet
Function Pr. Pr. group
Name
Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Gr.1 Gr.2
Customer setting
-- 446
B012
Model position control gain
0 to 150 s-1
1 s-1
25 s-1
450
C200 Second applied motor
[200/400 V class]
0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 16,
20, 23, 30, 33, 40, 43, 50,
53, 70, 73, 1800, 1803,
8090, 8093, 9090, 9093, 9999
1
[575 V class]
0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 16,
30, 33, 8090, 8093, 9090,
9093, 9999
9999
Second motor constant
451
G300 Second motor control method selection 10 to 12, 20, 40, 9999 1
9999
453
C201 Second motor capacity
0.1 to 30 kW, 9999
0.01 kW
9999
454
C202 Number of second motor poles
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 9999 1
9999
455
C225 Second motor excitation current
0 to 500 A, 9999
0.01 A
9999
[200 V class]
2
456
C204 Rated second motor voltage
0 to 1000 V
0.1 V
200 V [400 V class] 400 V
[575 V class]
575 V
Parameter list
457
C205 Rated second motor frequency
10 to 400 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
9999
458
C220 Second motor constant (R1)
0 to 50 , 9999
0.001
9999
459
C221 Second motor constant (R2)
0 to 50 , 9999
0.001
9999
460
C222
Second motor constant (L1) / d-axis inductance (Ld)
0 to 6000 mH, 9999
0.1 mH
9999
461
C223
Second motor constant (L2) / q-axis inductance (Lq)
0 to 6000 mH, 9999
0.1 mH
9999
462
C224 Second motor constant (X)
0% to 100%, 9999
0.1%
9999
463
C210 Second motor auto tuning setting/status 0, 1, 11
1
0
464
B020
Digital position control sudden stop deceleration time
0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
465
B021
First target position lower 4 digits
0 to 9999
1
0
466
B022
First target position upper 4 digits
0 to 9999
1
0
467
B023
Second target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999
1
0
Position control
468
B024
Second target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999
1
0
469
B025
Third target position lower 4 digits
0 to 9999
1
0
470
B026
Third target position upper 4 digits
0 to 9999
1
0
471
B027
Fourth target position lower 4 digits
0 to 9999
1
0
472
B028
Fourth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999
1
0
473
B029
Fifth target position lower 4 digits
0 to 9999
1
0
474
B030
Fifth target position upper 4 digits
0 to 9999
1
0
475
B031
Sixth target position lower 4 digits
0 to 9999
1
0
476
B032
Sixth target position upper 4 digits
0 to 9999
1
0
477
B033
Seventh target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999
1
0
478
B034
Seventh target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999
1
0
Remote output
495
M500 Remote output selection
0, 1, 10, 11
1
0
496
M501 Remote output data 1
0 to 4095
1
0
497
M502 Remote output data 2
0 to 4095
1
0
-- 498
A804
PLC function flash memory clear
0, 9696 (0 to 9999)
1
0
-- 502
N013
Stop mode selection at communication error
0 to 2, 6
1
0
503
E710
Maintenance timer
0 (1 to 9998)
1
0
Maintenance
504
E711
Maintenance timer warning output set time
0 to 9998, 9999
1
9999
Lif e check
-- 505 506 507 509
510
M001 E705 E706 E708
B196
Speed setting reference
1 to 590 Hz
Display estimated main circuit capacitor residual life
(0% to 100%)
Display ABC relay contact life
0% to 100%
Display power cycle life
(0% to 100%)
Rough match output range
0 to 32767
0.01 Hz 1% 1% 0.01%
1
60 Hz 50 Hz 100% 100% 100%
0
Position control
511
B197
Home position return shifting speed 0 to 400 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.5 Hz
538
B015
Current position retention selection
1, 2, 11, 12, 9999
1
9999
541 N100 Frequency command sign selection 0, 1
1
0
USB Communication
544 N103
547
N040
548
N041
CC-Link extended setting
0, 1, 12, 14, 18, 38, 100, 112, 114, 118, 138
1
USB communication station number 0 to 31 USB communication check time interval 0 to 999.8 s, 9999
1 0.1 s
0
0 9999
54
Communication
Function Pr. 549
550
551
-- 552 553 554 555 556
Pr. group
Name
Setting range
N000
D012
D013
H429 A603 A604 E720 E721
Protocol selection [E800]
0, 1
[E800]
NET mode operation command source 0, 2, 9999
selection
[E800-(SC)E]
0, 5, 9999
PU mode operation command source selection
[E800] 2 to 4, 9999 [E800-(SC)E] 3, 4, 9999
Frequency jump range
0 to 30 Hz, 9999
PID deviation limit
0% to 100%, 9999
PID signal operation selection
0 to 3, 10 to 13
Current average time Data output mask time
0.1 to 1 s 0 to 20 s
Minimum Initial value
setting increments
Gr.1
Gr.2
1
0
Customer setting
1
9999
1
0.01 Hz 0.1% 1 0.1 s 0.1 s
9999
9999 9999 0 1 s 0 s
557
E722
Current average value monitor signal output reference current
0 to 500 A
0.01 A
Inverter rated current
2
Average current PID monitoring control
-- 560 -- 561 -- 563 -- 564
A712 H020 M021 M031
Second frequency search gain PTC thermistor protection level Energization time carrying-over times Operating time carrying-over times
0 to 32767, 9999 0.5 to 30 k, 9999 (0 to 65535) (0 to 65535)
1 0.01 k 1 1
9999 9999 0 0
Parameter list
569
G942 Second motor speed control gain
0% to 200%, 9999
0.1%
9999
Multiple Second motor rating constant
PI D control
Traverse
Electronic thermal O/L relay
sequence
570
-- 571 -- 574
575 576 577 592 593 594
595 596 597 600 601 602 603
604
-- 607 -- 608
609
610
-- 611 -- 631
639
640
653
E301
F103 C211 A621 A622 A623 A300 A301 A302
A303 A304 A305 H001 H002 H003 H004
H005
H006 H016 A624
A625
F003 H182 A108
A109
G410
Multiple rating setting [3-phase]
1, 2
Holding time at a start
0 to 10 s, 9999
Second motor online auto tuning
0, 1
Output interruption detection time
0 to 3600 s, 9999
Output interruption detection level
0 to 590 Hz
Output interruption cancel level
900% to 1100%
Traverse function selection
0 to 2
Maximum amplitude amount
0% to 25%
Amplitude compensation amount during deceleration
0% to 50%
Amplitude compensation amount during acceleration
0% to 50%
Amplitude acceleration time
0.1 to 3600 s
Amplitude deceleration time
0.1 to 3600 s
First free thermal reduction frequency 1 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
First free thermal reduction ratio 1
1% to 100%
First free thermal reduction frequency 2 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
First free thermal reduction ratio 2
1% to 100%
First free thermal reduction frequency 3 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
Motor permissible load level Second motor permissible load level PID set point/deviation input selection
PID measured value input selection
Acceleration time at a restart Inverter output fault detection enable/ disable selection Brake opening current selection
110% to 250% 110% to 250%, 9999 2 to 5
2 to 5
0 to 3600 s, 9999
0, 1
0, 1
Brake operation frequency selection 0, 1
Speed smoothing control
0% to 200%
1
0.1 s 1 0.1 s 0.01 Hz 0.1% 1 0.1% 0.1%
0.1% 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.01 Hz 1% 0.01 Hz 1%
0.01 Hz
1% 1% 1
1
0.1 s 1 1
1
0.1%
2
9999 0 1 s 0 Hz 1000% 0 10% 10%
10% 5 s 5 s 9999 100% 9999 100%
9999
150% 9999 2
3
9999 0 0
0
0%
654
G411
Speed smoothing cutoff frequency
0 to 120 Hz
0.01 Hz
20 Hz
PID control
Speed smoothing Brake
control
55
Increased magnetic excitation deceleration
Function Pr. 660 661
Pr. group
Name
G130 G131
Increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation selection Magnetic excitation increase rate
Setting range 0, 1 0% to 40%, 9999
Minimum Initial value
setting increments
Gr.1
Gr.2
1
0
Customer setting
0.1%
9999
662
G132
Increased magnetic excitation current level
0% to 200%
0.1%
100%
-- 665
G125 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 0% to 200%
0.1%
100%
-- 673
G060
SF-PR slip amount adjustment operation selection [200/400 V class]
2, 4, 6, 9999
1
9999
-- 674
G061
SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain [200/400 V class]
0% to 500%
0.1%
100%
2
-- 675 -- 690
A805 H881
User parameter auto storage function selection Deceleration check time
1, 9999 0 to 3600 s, 9999
1 0.1 s
9999 1 s
Electronic thermal O/L relay
692
H011
Second free thermal reduction frequency 1
0 to 590 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
9999
Parameter list
693
H012 Second free thermal reduction ratio 1 1% to 100%
1%
100%
694
H013
Second free thermal reduction frequency 2
0 to 590 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
9999
695
H014 Second free thermal reduction ratio 2 1% to 100%
1%
100%
696
H015
Second free thermal reduction frequency 3
0 to 590 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
9999
-- 698
G219 Speed control D gain
0% to 100%
0.1%
0%
-- 699
T740
Input terminal filter [E800(-E)]
5 to 50 ms, 9999
1 ms
9999
702
C106 Maximum motor frequency
0 to 400 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
9999
706
C130 Induced voltage constant (phi f)
0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 9999
0.1 mV (rad/ s)
9999
707
C107 Motor inertia (integer)
10 to 999, 9999
1
9999
Motor constant
711
C131 Motor Ld decay ratio
0% to 100%, 9999
0.1%
9999
712
C132 Motor Lq decay ratio
0% to 100%, 9999
0.1%
9999
717
C182
Starting resistance tuning compensation coefficient 1
0% to 200%, 9999
0.1%
9999
720
C188
Starting resistance tuning compensation coefficient 2
0% to 200%, 9999
0.1%
9999
721
C185
Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width
0 to 6000 s, 9999
1 s
9999
724
C108 Motor inertia (exponent)
0 to 7, 9999
1
9999
725
C133 Motor protection current level
100% to 500%, 9999 0.1%
9999
728
N052
Device instance number (Upper 3 digits) [E800-(SC)EPA]
0 to 419
1
0
Ethernet
Motor constant
729
737
738 739 740 741
742 743 744 745 746 -- 759
N053
C288
C230 C231 C232 C282
C285 C206 C207 C208 C233 A600
Device instance number (Lower 4 digits) [E800-(SC)EPA]
0 to 9999
Second motor starting resistance tuning compensation coefficient 2
0% to 200%, 9999
Second motor induced voltage constant 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s),
(phi f)
9999
Second motor Ld decay ratio
0% to 100%, 9999
Second motor Lq decay ratio
0% to 100%, 9999
Second motor starting resistance tuning compensation coefficient 1
0% to 200%, 9999
Second motor magnetic pole detection pulse width
0 to 6000 s, 9999
Second motor maximum frequency 0 to 400 Hz, 9999
Second motor inertia (integer)
10 to 999, 9999
Second motor inertia (exponent)
0 to 7, 9999
Second motor protection current level 100% to 500%, 9999
PID unit selection
0 to 43, 9999
1
0
0.1%
9999
0.1 mV (rad/ s) 0.1% 0.1%
9999
9999 9999
0.1%
9999
1 s
0.01 Hz 1 1 0.1% 1
9999
9999 9999 9999 9999 9999
Monitoring
774
M101 Operation panel monitor selection 1
1
[E800][E800-(SC)EPB]
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17 to 20,
23 to 33, 35, 38, 40 to 42,
44, 45, 50 to 57, 61, 62,
64, 65, 67, 91, 97, 100,
775
M102
Operation panel monitor selection 2
9999 [E800-(SC)EPA]
1
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17 to 20,
23 to 33, 35, 38, 40 to 42,
44, 45, 50 to 57, 61, 62,
64, 65, 67, 83, 91, 97,
100, 9999
776
M103 Operation panel monitor selection 3
1
9999 9999 9999
56
Function Pr. Pr. group
Name
Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Gr.1 Gr.2
Customer setting
-- 779
N014
Operation frequency during communication error
0 to 590 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
9999
-- 791
F070
Acceleration time in low-speed range 0 to 3600 s, 9999
0.1 s
9999
-- 792
F071
Deceleration time in low-speed range 0 to 3600 s, 9999
0.1 s
9999
-- 800 -- 801
G200 H704
Control method selection Output limit level
0 to 5, 9, 10 to 12, 19, 20, 40
1
0% to 400%, 9999
0.1%
40 9999
-- 802
G102 Pre-excitation selection
0, 1
1
0
Speed Torque limit command
803
G210
Constant output range torque characteristic selection
0 to 2, 10
804
D400 Torque command source selection
0, 1, 3 to 6
1
0
1
0
805
D401 Torque command value (RAM)
600% to 1400%
1%
1000%
806
D402
Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM)
600% to 1400%
1%
1000%
807
H410 Speed limit selection
0, 1
1
0
808
H411
Speed limit
809
H412 Reverse-side speed limit
0 to 400 Hz 0 to 400 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz
60 Hz 50 Hz 9999
2
810
H700
Torque limit input method selection
0 to 2
1
0
Torque limit
Parameter list
811
D030 Set resolution switchover
0, 10
1
0
812
H701 Torque limit level (regeneration)
0% to 400%, 9999
0.1%
9999
813
H702 Torque limit level (3rd quadrant)
0% to 400%, 9999
0.1%
9999
814
H703 Torque limit level (4th quadrant)
0% to 400%, 9999
0.1%
9999
815
H710 Torque limit level 2
0% to 400%, 9999
0.1%
9999
816
H720 Torque limit level during acceleration 0% to 400%, 9999
0.1%
9999
817
H721 Torque limit level during deceleration 0% to 400%, 9999
0.1%
9999
820
G211
Speed control P gain 1
0% to 1000%
1%
60%
821
G212 Speed control integral time 1
0 to 20 s
0.001 s
0.333 s
822
T003
Speed setting filter 1
0 to 5 s, 9999
0.001 s
9999
823 824
G215 G213
Speed detection filter 1 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain)
0 to 0.01 s 0% to 500%
0.001 s 1%
0.001 s 100%
825
G214
Torque control integral time 1 (current loop integral time)
0 to 500 ms
0.1 ms
5 ms
Adjustment
826
T004
Torque setting filter 1
0 to 5 s, 9999
0.001 s
9999
828
G224 Model speed control gain
0 to 1000 rad/s
1 rad/s
100 rad/s
830
G311
Speed control P gain 2
0% to 1000%, 9999
1%
9999
831
G312 Speed control integral time 2
0 to 20 s, 9999
0.001 s
9999
832
T005
Speed setting filter 2
0 to 5 s, 9999
0.001 s
9999
833 834
G315 G313
Speed detection filter 2 Torque control P gain 2 (current loop proportional gain)
0 to 0.01 s, 9999 0% to 500%, 9999
0.001 s 1%
9999 9999
835
G314
Torque control integral time 2 (current loop integral time)
0 to 500 ms, 9999
0.1 ms
9999
836
T006
Torque setting filter 2
0 to 5 s, 9999
0.001 s
9999
840
G230 Torque bias selection
0 to 3, 9999
1
9999
841
G231 Torque bias 1
600% to 1400%, 9999 1%
9999
Torque bias
842
G232 Torque bias 2
600% to 1400%, 9999 1%
9999
843
G233 Torque bias 3
600% to 1400%, 9999 1%
9999
844
G234 Torque bias filter
0 to 5 s, 9999
0.001 s
9999
845
G235 Torque bias operation time
0 to 5 s, 9999
0.01 s
9999
846
G236
Torque bias balance compensation
0% to 100%, 9999
0.1%
9999
847
G237 Fall-time torque bias terminal 4 bias 0% to 400%, 9999
1%
9999
848
G238 Fall-time torque bias terminal 4 gain 0% to 400%, 9999
1%
9999
849
T007
Analog input offset adjustment
0% to 200%
0.1%
100%
850
G103 Brake operation selection
0 to 2
1
0
853
H417 Speed deviation time
0 to 100 s
0.1 s
1 s
854
G217 Excitation ratio
0% to 100%
1%
100%
858
T040
Terminal 4 function assignment
0, 4, 6, 9999
1
0
859
C126 Torque current/Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A, 9999
0.01 A
9999
860
C226
Second motor torque current/Rated PM motor current
0 to 500 A, 9999
0.01 A
9999
864
M470 Torque detection
0% to 400%
0.1%
150%
865
M446 Low speed detection
0 to 590 Hz
0.01 Hz
1.5 Hz
Indication Additional function
866
M042 Torque monitoring reference
0% to 400%
0.1%
150%
Protective function
-- 867 -- 870
872
M321 M440
H201
AM output filter [E800-4][E800-5]
0 to 5 s
Speed detection hysteresis
0 to 15 Hz
Input phase phase]
loss
protection
selection
[3-
0,
1
873 H415 Speed limit
0 to 400 Hz
874
H730 OLT level setting
0% to 400%
0.01 s 0.01 Hz 1
0.01 Hz 0.1%
0.01 s 0 Hz 1
20 Hz 150%
57
Function Pr. Pr. group
Name
Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Gr.1 Gr.2
Customer setting
877
G220
Speed feed forward control/model adaptive speed control selection
0 to 2
1
0
Control system
878
G221 Speed feed forward filter
0.01 to 1 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
879
G222 Speed feed forward torque limit
0% to 400%
0.1%
150%
880
C114
Load inertia ratio
0 to 200 times
0.1 time
7 times
881
G223 Speed feed forward gain
0% to 1000%
1%
0%
882
G120
Regeneration avoidance operation selection
0 to 2
1
0
Regeneration avoidance
883
G121 Regeneration avoidance operation level 300 to 1200 V
0.1 V
[200 V class] 400 V [400 V class] 780 V [575 V class] 944 V
885
G123
Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value
0 to 45 Hz, 9999
0.01 Hz
6 Hz
2
886
G124 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 0% to 200%
888
E420
Free parameter 1
0 to 9999
0.1% 1
100% 9999
Fre e parameter
Energy saving monitoring
Parameter list
889
E421
Free parameter 2
0 to 9999
1
9999
Calibration parameter
891
M023
Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times
0 to 4, 9999
892
M200 Load factor
30% to 150%
893
M201
Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity)
0.1 to 30 kW
894
M202
Control selection during commercial power-supply operation
0 to 3
895
M203 Power saving rate reference value
0, 1, 9999
896
M204 Power unit cost
0 to 500, 9999
897
M205 Power saving monitor average time 0 to 1000 h, 9999
898
M206 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 0, 1, 10, 9999
899
M207 Operation time rate (estimated value) 0% to 100%, 9999
C0 (900)
M310
FM terminal calibration [E800-1]
--
C1 (901)
M320
AM terminal calibration [E800-4][E8005]
--
C2 (902)
T200
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency
0 to 590 Hz
C3 (902)
T201
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
0% to 300%
125 (903)
T202
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency
0 to 590 Hz
C4 (903)
T203
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
0% to 300%
C5 (904)
T400
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency
0 to 590 Hz
C6 (904)
T401
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
0% to 300%
126 (905)
T402
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
0 to 590 Hz
C7 (905)
T403
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
0% to 300%
C38 (932)
T410
Terminal 4 bias command (torque/ magnetic flux)
0% to 400%
C39 (932)
T411
Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic flux) 0% to 300%
C40 (933)
T412
Terminal 4 gain command (torque/ magnetic flux)
0% to 400%
C41 (933)
T413
Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux) 0% to 300%
C42 (934)
A630
PID display bias coefficient
0 to 500, 9999
C43 (934)
A631
PID display bias analog value
0% to 300%
C44 (935)
A632
PID display gain coefficient
0 to 500, 9999
C45 (935)
A633
PID display gain analog value
0% to 300%
-- 986
H110
Display safety fault code [E800-SCE] 0 to 127
990
E104
PU buzzer control [E800]
0, 1
991
E105
PU contrast adjustment [E800]
0 to 63
1 0.1% 0.01 kW
1 1 0.01 1 h 1 0.1% --
--
0.01 Hz
0.1%
0.01 Hz
0.1%
0.01 Hz
0.1%
0.01 Hz
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.01
0.1%
0.01
0.1% 1 1 1
992
M104
Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection [E800]
0 to 3, 5 to 14, 17 to 20,
23 to 33, 35, 38, 40 to 42, 44, 45, 50 to 57, 61, 62,
1
64, 65, 67, 91, 97, 100
-- 997 -- 998
H103 Fault initiation
0 to 255, 9999
1
E430
PM parameter initialization Simple
0, 8009, 8109, 9009, 9109,
1
9999 100% Inverter rated capacity 0 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 --
--
0 Hz
0%
60 Hz 50 Hz
100%
0 Hz
20%
60 Hz 50 Hz
100%
0%
0%
150%
100%
9999
20%
9999
100% 0 1 58
0
9999 0
PID display
Monitoring PU
58
Function Pr. Pr. group
Name
Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Gr.1 Gr.2
Customer setting
-- 999
E431
Automatic parameter setting Simple 10, 12, 20, 21, 9999
1
9999
Clock
-- 1002
C150
Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient
50% to 150%, 9999
0.1%
9999
1006
E020
Clock (year)
2000 to 2099
1
2000
1007
E021
Clock (month, day)
Jan. 1 to Dec. 31
1
101
1008
E022
Clock (hour, minute)
0:00 to 23:59
1
0
-- 1015
A607
Integral stop selection at limited frequency
0 to 2
1
0
-- 1016
H021
PTC thermistor protection detection time
0 to 60 s
1 s
0 s
1020
A900
Trace operation selection
0 to 3
1
0
1022
A902
Sampling cycle
1, 2, 5, 10, 50, 100, 500, 1000
1
1
1023
A903
Number of analog channels
1 to 8
1
4
1024
A904
Sampling auto start
0, 1
1
0
1025 1026
A905 A906
Trigger mode selection Number of sampling before trigger
0 to 4 0% to 100%
1
0
1%
90%
2
Parameter list
1027
A910
Analog source selection (1ch)
201
1028 1029
A911 A912
Analog source selection (2ch) Analog source selection (3ch)
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 23, 24, 32, 33, 35, 40 to 42, 52 to 54, 61, 62, 64,
202 203
1030 1031
A913 A914
Analog source selection (4ch) Analog source selection (5ch)
65, 67, 83 [E800(SC)EPA], 91, 97, 201 to
1
204 205
1032 1033
A915 A916
Analog source selection (6ch) Analog source selection (7ch)
210, 212, 213, 222 to 227, 229 to 232, 235 to 238
206 207
1034
A917
Analog source selection (8ch)
208
1035
A918
Analog trigger channel
1 to 8
1
1
1036
A919
Analog trigger operation selection
0, 1
1
0
1037
A920
Analog trigger level
600 to 1400
1
1000
1038
A930
Digital source selection (1ch)
0
1039
A931
Digital source selection (2ch)
0
1040
A932
Digital source selection (3ch)
0
1041 1042
A933 A934
Digital source selection (4ch) Digital source selection (5ch)
0 to 255
1
0 0
1043
A935
Digital source selection (6ch)
0
1044
A936
Digital source selection (7ch)
0
1045
A937
Digital source selection (8ch)
0
1046
A938
Digital trigger channel
1 to 8
1
1
1047
A939
Digital trigger operation selection
0, 1
1
0
-- 1103
F040
Deceleration time at emergency stop 0 to 3600 s
0.1 s
5 s
1106
M050 Torque monitor filter
0 to 5 s, 9999
0.01 s
9999
1107
M051 Running speed monitor filter
0 to 5 s, 9999
0.01 s
9999
Trace
Monitoring
1108
M052 Excitation current monitor filter
0 to 5 s, 9999
0.01 s
9999
-- 1124 -- 1125
N681 N682
Station number in inverter-to-inverter link [E800-(SC)E] Number of inverters in inverter-toinverter link system [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 5, 9999 2 to 6
1
9999
1
2
PLC function
1150 to 1199
A810 to A859
PLC function user parameters 1 to 50
0 to 65535
1
0
-- 1200
M390
AM output offset calibration [E8004][E800-5]
2700 to 3300
1
3000
59
Function Pr. Pr. group
Name
Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Gr.1 Gr.2
Customer setting
1222
B120
First positioning acceleration time
0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
5 s
1223
B121
First positioning deceleration time
0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
5 s
1225
B123
First positioning sub-function
0, 1, 10, 11, 100, 101, 110, 111
1
10
1226
B124
Second positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
5 s
1227
B125
Second positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
5 s
1229
B127
Second positioning sub-function
0, 1, 10, 11, 100, 101, 110, 111
1
10
1230
B128
Third positioning acceleration time
0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
5 s
1231
B129
Third positioning deceleration time
0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
5 s
Position control
1233
B131
Third positioning sub-function
0, 1, 10, 11, 100, 101, 110, 111
1
10
1234
B132
Fourth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
5 s
1235
B133
Fourth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
5 s
2
1237
B135
Fourth positioning sub-function
0, 1, 10, 11, 100, 101, 110, 111
1
10
1238
B136
Fifth positioning acceleration time
0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
5 s
1239
B137
Fifth positioning deceleration time
0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
5 s
Parameter list
1241
B139
Fifth positioning sub-function
0, 1, 10, 11, 100, 101, 110, 111
1
10
1242
B140
Sixth positioning acceleration time
0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
5 s
1243
B141
Sixth positioning deceleration time
0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
5 s
1245
B143
Sixth positioning sub-function
0, 1, 10, 11, 100, 101, 110, 111
1
10
1246
B144
Seventh positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
5 s
1247
B145
Seventh positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s
0.01 s
5 s
1249
B147
Seventh positioning sub-function
0, 10, 100, 110
1
10
1282
B180
Home position return method selection
2, 3, 4, 6, 103, 106, 203, 206
1
4
Home position return
1283
B181
Home position return speed
0 to 400 Hz
0.01 Hz
2 Hz
1285
B183
Home position shift amount lower 4 digits
0 to 9999
1
0
1286
B184
Home position shift amount upper 4 digits
0 to 9999
1
0
1289
B187
Home position return stopper torque 0% to 200%
0.1%
40%
1290
B188
Home position return stopper waiting time
0 to 10 s
0.1 s
0.5 s
1292
B190
Position control terminal input selection
0, 1, 10, 11, 100, 101, 110, 111
1
0
1293
B191
Roll feeding mode selection
0 to 2
1
0
Position detection
1294
B192
Position detection lower 4 digits
0 to 9999
1
0
1295
B193
Position detection upper 4 digits
0 to 9999
1
0
1296
B194
Position detection selection
0 to 2
1
0
1297
B195
Position detection hysteresis width
0 to 32767
1
0
User Defined Cyclic Communication
1318
N800
Input fixing format selection [E800-
20 to 23, 9999
1
(SC)EPA]
9999
User defined cyclic communication
User Defined Cyclic Communication
1319
N801
Output fixing format selection [E800- 70 to 73, 9999
1
(SC)EPA]
9999
1320 to N810 to User Defined Cyclic Communication
1329
N819
Input 1 to 10 Mapping [E800-(SC)E]
[E800-(SC)EPA]
12288 to 13787, 20488,
20489, 9999 [E800-(SC)EPB]
1
5, 100, 12288 to 13787,
20488, 20489, 9999
9999
1330 to 1343
N850 to N863
User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 to 14 Mapping [E800-(SC)E]
[E800-(SC)EPA]
12288 to 13787, 16384 to
16483, 20488, 20489,
20981 to 20990, 9999
[E800-(SC)EPB]
1
6, 101, 12288 to 13787,
16384 to 16483, 20488,
20489, 20981 to 20990,
9999
9999
-- 1399
N649
Inverter identification enable/disable selection [E800-(SC)E]
0, 1
1
1
-- 1412
C135
Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent
0 to 2, 9999
1
9999
-- 1413
C235
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent
0 to 2, 9999
1
9999
60
Function Pr.
1424 1425 1426
Pr. group
Name
Setting range
N650 N651 N641
Ethernet communication network number [E800-(SC)E]
1 to 239
Ethernet communication station number [E800-(SC)E]
1 to 120
Link speed and duplex mode selection [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 4
Minimum Initial value
setting increments
Gr.1
Gr.2
1
1
Customer setting
1
1
1
0
Ethernet function selection
1427
N630
Ethernet function selection 1 [E800(SC)E]
[E800-(SC)EPA]
1
5001
502, 5000 to 5002, 5006
1428
N631
Ethernet function selection 2 [E800(SC)E]
to 5008, 5010 to 5013, 44818, 45237, 45238,
1
45237
47808, 61450, 9999
[E800-(SC)EPB]
1429
N632
Ethernet function selection 3 [E800(SC)E]
502, 5000 to 5002, 5006 to 5008, 5010 to 5013,
1
45238
34962, 45237, 45238,
1430
N633
Ethernet function selection 4 [E800(SC)E]
61450, 9999
1
9999
2
Parameter list
1431
1432 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455 1456
1457
N643
N644 N600 N601 N602 N603 N610 N611 N612 N613 N660
N661
N662
N663
N664
N665
N666
N670
N671
N672
N673
N674
N675
N642 N647
N648
Ethernet signal loss detection function selection [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 3
Ethernet communication check time interval [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 999.8 s, 9999
IP address 1 (Ethernet) [E800-(SC)E] 0 to 255
IP address 2 (Ethernet) [E800-(SC)E] 0 to 255
IP address 3 (Ethernet) [E800-(SC)E] 0 to 255
IP address 4 (Ethernet) [E800-(SC)E] 0 to 255
Subnet mask 1 [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 255
Subnet mask 2 [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 255
Subnet mask 3 [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 255
Subnet mask 4 [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 255
IP filter address 1 (Ethernet) [E800(SC)E]
0 to 255
IP filter address 2 (Ethernet) [E800(SC)E]
0 to 255
IP filter address 3 (Ethernet) [E800(SC)E]
0 to 255
IP filter address 4 (Ethernet) [E800(SC)E]
0 to 255
IP filter address 2 range specification (Ethernet) [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 255, 9999
IP filter address 3 range specification (Ethernet) [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 255, 9999
IP filter address 4 range specification (Ethernet) [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 255, 9999
Ethernet command source selection IP address 1 [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 255
Ethernet command source selection IP address 2 [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 255
Ethernet command source selection IP address 3 [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 255
Ethernet command source selection IP address 4 [E800-(SC)E]
0 to 255
Ethernet command source selection IP address 3 range specification [E800- 0 to 255, 9999 (SC)E]
Ethernet command source selection IP address 4 range specification [E800- 0 to 255, 9999 (SC)E]
Keepalive time [E800-(SC)E]
1 to 7200 s
Network diagnosis selection [E800(SC)E]
0 to 2, 9999
Extended setting for Ethernet signal loss detection function selection [E800- 0 to 3, 8888, 9999 (SC)E]
1
0.1 s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
3
1.5 192 168 50 1 255 255 255 0 0
0
0
0
9999
9999
9999
0
0
0
0
9999
9999
60 s 9999
9999
Ethernet
61
Function Pr. Pr. group
Name
Setting range
Minimum setting
increments
Initial value Gr.1 Gr.2
Customer setting
1480
H520
Load characteristics measurement mode
0, 1 (2 to 5, 81 to 85) 1
0
Load characteristics fault detection
1481
H521
Load characteristics load reference 1 0% to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1%
9999
1482
H522
Load characteristics load reference 2 0% to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1%
9999
1483
H523
Load characteristics load reference 3 0% to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1%
9999
1484
H524
Load characteristics load reference 4 0% to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1%
9999
1485
H525
Load characteristics load reference 5 0% to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1%
9999
1486
H526
Load characteristics maximum frequency
0 to 590 Hz
0.01 Hz
60 Hz 50 Hz
1487
H527
Load characteristics minimum frequency
0 to 590 Hz
0.01 Hz
6 Hz
1488
H531
Upper limit warning detection width
0% to 400%, 9999
0.1%
20%
1489
H532
Lower limit warning detection width
0% to 400%, 9999
0.1%
20%
1490
H533
Upper limit fault detection width
0% to 400%, 9999
0.1%
9999
1491
H534
Lower limit fault detection width
0% to 400%, 9999
0.1%
9999
2
1492
H535
Load status detection signal delay time / load reference measurement waiting 0 to 60 s
0.1 s
1 s
time
-- 1499
E415
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
PR.CL
Parameter clear
(0), 1
1
0
ALLC
All parameter clear
(0), 1
1
0
Clear parameters
Parameter list
ER.CL
Fault history clear
(0), 1
1
0
-- PR.CH -- PM -- AUTO -- PR.MD
Initial value change list PM parameter initialization Automatic parameter setting Group parameter setting
-- 0 -- (0), 1, 2
1
0
1
0
--
--
1
0
Differs depending on the capacity. 6%: FR-E820-0050(0.75K) or lower, FR-E840-0026(0.75K) or lower, and FR-E820S-0050(0.75K) or lower
5%: FR-E860-0017(0.75K)
4%: FR-E820-0080(1.5K) to FR-E820-0175(3.7K), FR-E840-0040(1.5K) to FR-E840-0095(3.7K), and FR-E820S-0080(1.5K) or higher
3%: FR-E820-0240(5.5K), FR-E820-0330(7.5K), FR-E840-0120(5.5K), FR-E840-0170(7.5K), FR-E860-0027(1.5K), and FR-E860-0040(2.2K)
2%: FR-E820-0470(11K) or higher, FR-E840-0230(11K) or higher, and FR-E860-0061(3.7K) or higher
Differs depending on the capacity. 5 s: FR-E820-0175(3.7K) or lower, FR-E840-0095(3.7K) or lower, FR-E860-0061(3.7K) or lower, and FR-E820S-0110(2.2K) or lower
10 s: FR-E820-0240(5.5K), FR-E820-0330(7.5K), FR-E840-0120(5.5K), FR-E840-0170(7.5K), and FR-E860-0090(5.5K) or higher
15 s: FR-E820-0470(11K) or higher and FR-E840-0230(11K) or higher
Differs depending on the capacity. 6%: FR-E820-0015(0.2K) or lower and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K) or lower
4%: FR-E820-0030(0.4K) to FR-E820-0330(7.5K), FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to FR-E840-0170(7.5K), and FR-E820S-0030(0.4K) or higher
2%: FR-E820-0470(11K) or higher and FR-E840-0230(11K) or higher
1%: FR-E860-0017(0.75K) or higher
The setting is available only when a Vector control compatible option is installed. On the LCD operation panel used as the command source, the parameter number in parentheses appears instead of that starting with the letter C. For the Ethernet model and the safety communication model, the setting is available only when the FR-A8AY is installed. Available when the PLC function is enabled. (Pr.313 to Pr.315 are always available for settings in the Ethernet model and the safety communication model.) For the standard model, the setting is available only when a communication option is installed.
62
Protective Functions
Error message
A message regarding operational fault or setting fault on the operation panel is displayed. The inverter output is not shut off.
Operation panel JOEJDBUJPO
HOLD
Name
Description
Operation panel lock Operation lock is set. Operation other than pressing the STOP/RESET key is disabled.
LOCD Password locked Password function is active. Display and setting of parameters are restricted.
to Er1 to Er4
Parameter write error
Err.
Error
Appears when an error occurred during parameter writing.
� The RES signal is turned ON. � This error may occur when the voltage at the input side of the inverter drops.
Warning
The inverter output is not shut off even when a warning is displayed. However, failure to take appropriate measures will lead to a fault.
Operation panel indication
Name
Data code
Description
OLC
Stall prevention (overcurrent)
1
When the output current of the inverter increases, the stall prevention (overcurrent) function
(H01) is activated.
3
Protective Functions
OLV
Stall prevention (overvoltage)
2 (H02)
� When the output voltage of the inverter increases, the stall prevention (overvoltage) function is activated.
� The regeneration avoidance function is activated due to excessive regenerative power of
the motor.
RB
Regenerative brake 3
pre-alarm
(H03)
Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty value. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV[ ]) occurs.
TH
Electronic thermal relay function prealarm
4 (H04)
Appears if the cumulative value of the electronic thermal O/L relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the preset level of Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay.
PS
PU stop
6 (H06)
� The motor is stopped using the STOP/RESET key under the mode other than the PU operation mode.
� The motor is stopped by the emergency stop function.
SL
Speed limit indication
9 (H09)
Output if the speed limit level is exceeded during torque control.
SA
Safety stop
12 (H0C)
Appears when safety stop function is activated (during output shutoff).
MT
Maintenance timer 8
Appears when the inverter's cumulative energization time reaches or exceeds the
(H08) parameter set value.
CF
Continuous operation during communication fault
10 (H0A)
Appears when the operation continues while an error is occurring in the communication line or communication option (when Pr.502 = "4").
LDF
Load fault warning
26 (H1A)
Appears when the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr.1488 Upper limit warning detection width or Pr.1489 Lower limit warning detection width.
EHR
Ethernet
28
Appears when Ethernet communication is interrupted by physical factors while Pr.1431
communication fault (H1C) Ethernet signal loss detection function selection = "1 to 3".
DIP
Duplicate
IP
address
32 (H20)
Appears when duplicate IP address is detected.
IP
IP address fault
38 (H26)
Appears when the IP address or the subnet mask is out of the specified range.
SE
Incorrect parameter 48
setting
(H30)
Appears when a start command is input while the condition to start operation is not satisfied in the motor setting (Pr.71, Pr.450, Pr.80, Pr.453, Pr.81, or Pr.454) for the control method selected in Pr.800 or Pr.451.
If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform
UV
Stall prevention (overcurrent)
-
normal functions. In addition, the motor torque will be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if the power supply voltage decreases to about 115 VAC (230 VAC for the 400 V class, 330 VAC for the 575 V class) or below, this function shuts off the
inverter output and "UV" is displayed. The warning is removed when the voltage returns to
normal.
LP
Stroke limit warning
20 (H14)
Appears when the Forward stroke end (LSP) signal or the Reverse stroke end (LSN) signal is assigned to the input terminal and the signal is turned OFF (normally closed input).
HP1
Home position return 21
setting error
(H15) Appears when an error occurs during the home position return operation under position
HP2
Home position return 22
control.
uncompleted
(H16)
Alarm
The inverter output is not shut off. An Alarm (LF) signal can also be output with a parameter setting.
Operation panel indication FN
Name Fan alarm
Description
For the inverter that contains a cooling fan, FN appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to a fault, low rotation speed, or different operation from the setting of Pr.244 Cooling fan operation selection.
63
Fault
When a protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and a Fault (ALM) signal is output. The data code is used for checking the fault detail via communication or with Pr.997 Fault initiation.
Data code 16 to 199
Operation panel indication
Name
Data code
Description
E.OC1
Overcurrent trip during acceleration
16 (H10)
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 230% of the rated current during acceleration, the protection circuit is activated and the inverter output is shut
off.
Overcurrent trip E.OC2 during constant
speed
17 (H11)
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 230% of the rated current during constant speed operation, the protection circuit is activated and the inverter
output is shut off.
E.OC3
Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop
18 (H12)
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 230% of the rated current during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protection
circuit is activated and the inverter output is shut off.
E.OV1
Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration
32 (H20)
If regenerative power causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
3
Regenerative
E.OV2
overvoltage trip during constant
33 (H21)
If regenerative power causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
speed
Protective Functions
E.OV3
Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop
34 (H22)
If regenerative power causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
E.THT
Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay function)
48 (H30)
If the temperature of the output transistor elements exceeds the protection level with a rated output current or higher flowing without the overcurrent trip (E.OC[]), the inverter output is stopped. (Overload capacity 150% 60 s)
Motor overload trip E.THM (electronic thermal
relay function)
49 (H31)
The electronic thermal O/L relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat, which is caused by overload or reduced cooling capability during low-speed operation. When the cumulative heat value reaches 85% of the Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, prealarm (TH) is output. When the accumulated value reaches the specified value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
E.FIN
Heat sink overheat
64 (H40)
When the heat sink overheats, the temperature sensor is activated, and the inverter output is stopped.
E.UVT Undervoltage
81 (H51)
When a PM motor is used, the protective function is activated in the following case: a fault such as power failure or voltage drop occurs, the converter voltage drops to cause the motor to coast, and restarting and coasting are repeated by the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function.
E.ILF
Input phase loss
82 (H52)
When Pr.872 Input phase loss protection selection is enabled ("1") and one of the three-
phase power input is lost, the inverter output is shut off. (This protective function is available for the three-phase power input model.)
E.OLT
Stall
prevention
stop
96 (H60)
If the output frequency has fallen to 0.5 Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3 seconds, a fault (E.OLT) appears and the inverter is shut off. OLC or OLV appears while
stall prevention is being activated.
E.SOT
Loss of synchronism 97
detection
(H61)
The inverter output is shut off when the motor operation is not synchronized. (This function is only available under PM sensorless vector control.)
E.LUP
Upper limit fault detection
98 (H62)
The inverter output is shut off when the load exceeds the upper limit fault detection range.
E.LDN
Lower limit fault detection
99 (H63)
The inverter output is shut off when the load falls below the lower limit fault detection range.
E.BE
Brake transistor alarm detection
112 (H70)
The inverter output is shut off if a fault due to damage of the brake transistor and such occurs in the brake circuit. In such a case, the power supply to the inverter must be shut off immediately.
E.GF
Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent
128 The inverter output is shut off if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows due to an earth (H80) (ground) fault that occurred on the inverter's output side (load side).
E.LF
Output phase loss
129 (H81)
The inverter output is shut off if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) is lost.
E.OHT
External thermal relay operation
144 (H90)
The inverter output is shut off if the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection or the internally mounted thermal relay in the motor, etc. switches ON (contacts open). (This protective function is available for the standard model and the Ethernet model.)
E.PTC
PTC thermistor operation
145 (H91)
The inverter output is shut off if resistance of the PTC thermistor connected between terminal 2 and terminal 10 is equal to or higher than the Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level setting for a continuous time equal to or longer than the setting value in Pr.1016 PTC thermistor protection detection time.
E.OPT Option fault
160 (HA0)
� Appears when the AC power supply is connected to terminal R/L1, S/L2, or T/L3 accidentally when a high power factor converter (FR-HC2) or multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC in common bus regeneration mode) is connected (when Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "0 or 2").
� Appears when the switch for manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed. � Appears when a communication option is connected while Pr.296 Password lock level =
"0 or 100".
64
Operation panel indication E.OP1
Name
Communication option fault
Data code
161 (HA1)
Description
The inverter output is shut off if a communication line error occurs in the communication option.
E.16
164 (HA4)
E.17 E.18 E.19
165
(HA5)
User definition error by the PLC function
166 (HA6)
167
(HA7)
The protective function is activated by setting "16 to 20" in the special register SD1214 for the PLC function. The inverter output is shut off when the protective function is activated. The protective function is activated when the PLC function is enabled.
E.20
168 (HA8)
E.PE
Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board)
176 (HB0)
The inverter output is shut off if a fault occurs in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure)
� The inverter output is shut off if communication between the inverter and PU is
suspended, e.g. the cable is disconnected from the PU connector, when the disconnected
PU detection function is valid in Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.
3
E.PUE PU disconnection
177 � The inverter output is shut off if communication errors occurred consecutively for more (HB1) than permissible number of retries when Pr.121 PU communication retry count "9999"
during the RS-485 communication.
� The inverter output is shut off if communication is broken within the period of time set in
Pr.122 PU communication check time interval during the RS-485 communication via
the PU connector. (This protective function is available for the standard model.)
Protective Functions
E.RET
Retry count excess
178 The inverter output is shut off if the operation cannot be resumed properly within the (HB2) number of retries set in Pr.67 Number of retries at fault occurrence.
E.PE2
Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board)
179 (HB3)
The inverter output is shut off if a fault occurs in the inverter model information.
E.CPU CPU fault
192 (HC0)
The inverter output is shut off if the communication fault of the built-in CPU occurs.
E.CDO
Inrush current limit circuit fault
196 (HC4)
The inverter output is shut off if the output current exceeds the Pr.150 Output current detection level setting.
E.IOH Analog input fault
197 The inverter output is shut off when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit is (HC5) overheated. The inrush current limit circuit is faulty.
E.AIE
Communication option fault
199 (HC7)
The inverter output is shut off when a 30 mA or higher current or a 7.5 V or higher voltage is input to terminal 2 while the current input is selected by Pr.73 Analog input selection, or to terminal 4 while the current input is selected by Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection.
Data code 200 or more
Operation panel indication E.USB
E.SAF
E.OS E.OSD E.ECT E.OD
Name
Data code
USB communication 200
fault
(HC8)
Safety circuit fault
201 (HC9)
Overspeed occurrence
208 (HD0)
Speed deviation excess detection
209 (HD1)
Signal loss detection Excessive position fault
210 (HD2)
211 (HD3)
Description
The inverter output is shut off when the communication is cut off for the time set in Pr.548 USB communication check time interval.
[Standard model / Ethernet model] � The inverter output is shut off when a safety circuit fault occurs. � The inverter output is shut off if the either of the wire between S1 and SIC or S2 and SIC
becomes nonconductive while using the safety stop function. � When the safety stop function is not used, the inverter output is shut off when the shorting
wire between terminals S1 and PC or across S2 and PC is disconnected. [Safety communication model] � When a fault related to functional safety occurs, the inverter output is shut off by the
protective function.
The inverter output is shut off when the motor speed exceeds the Pr.374 Overspeed detection level under encoder feedback control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control.
When Pr.285 Speed deviation excess detection frequency is set during Vector control or PM sensorless vector control, if the motor speed is increased or decreased by factors such as influence of the load and cannot be controlled in accordance with the speed command value, the deceleration check function (Pr.690) is activated to stop the inverter output.
The inverter output is shut off when the encoder signal is shut off under encoder feedback control or Vector control.
The inverter output is shut off when the difference between the position command and position feedback exceeds Pr.427 Excessive level error during position control.
65
Operation panel indication
Name
Data code
Description
E.MB1
213 (HD5)
E.MB2
214 (HD6)
E.MB3
215 (HD7)
E.MB4
Brake sequence fault
216 The inverter output is shut off when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake (HD8) sequence function (Pr.278 to Pr.285).
E.MB5
217 (HD9)
E.MB6
218 (HDA)
E.MB7
219 (HDB)
E.OA
Acceleration error
221 (HDD)
The acceleration error (E.OA) occurs and the inverter output is shut off when the acceleration rate of the motor rotation speed has exceeded the faulty acceleration rate detection level (Pr.375).
3
E.PID PID signal fault
230 (HE6)
The inverter output is shut off if the measured value exceeds the PID upper limit or PID lower limit parameter setting, or the absolute deviation value exceeds the PID deviation parameter setting during PID control.
� Appears when Ethernet communication is interrupted by physical factors while Pr.1431
Ethernet signal loss detection function selection = "3" or Pr.1457 Ethernet signal
Protective Functions
loss detection function selection (extended setting) = "3".
� The inverter output is shut off if Ethernet communication is broken for the time set in Pr.1432
Ethernet communication check time interval or longer for all devices with IP addresses
E.EHR
Ethernet
231
communication fault (HE7)
in the range specified for Ethernet command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454). � When the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is used, the inverter output is shut off in the
following cases: the data addressed to the own station is not received for the predetermined timeout period or longer, or the status bit of the cyclic transmission
addressed to the own station turns OFF (when the master inverter gives a command to
stop the cyclic transmission). � When BACnet/IP is used, the inverter output will be shut off after the time period set in
Pr.1432 after power is supplied to the inverter if an IP address of any other inverter falls within the Ethernet IP address range set for command source selection. (This protective
function is available for the Ethernet model and the safety communication model.)
E.CMB
Board combination mismatch
232 (HE8)
Appears when the combination of the circuit board and the inverter is not appropriate.
E.1 Option fault
241 (HF1)
� The inverter output is shut off when a contact failure occurs between the inverter and the
plug-in option. � Appears when the switch for manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
E.5
245 (HF5)
E.6 CPU fault
246 (HF6)
The inverter output is shut off if the communication fault of the built-in CPU occurs.
E.7
247 (HF7)
E.10
Inverter output fault
250 (HFA)
The inverter output is shut off if the inverter detects an output current fault such as an earth (ground) fault that occurred on the inverter's output side (load side).
The speed may not decelerate during low speed operation if the rotation direction of the
E.11
Opposite rotation 251 deceleration fault (HFB)
speed command and the estimated speed differ when the rotation is changing from forward
to reverse or from reverse to forward during torque control under Real sensorless vector control. The inverter output is shut off when overload occurs due to the un-switched rotation
direction.
E.13
Internal circuit fault
253 (HFD)
Appears when the internal circuit is faulty.
Others
The fault history and the operation status of the inverter are displayed. It is not a fault indication.
Operation panel indication
Name
Name
Fault history No fault history
The operation panel stores the fault indications which appear when a protective function is activated to display the fault record for the past 10 faults.
Appears when no fault records are stored. (Appears when the fault history is cleared after the protective function has been activated.)
Backup in progress
Restoration in progress
Backup operation is in progress to back up inverter parameters and the data used in the PLC function to a computer.
Restore operation is in progress to restore the backup data stored in the computer in the inverter.
Resetting the inverter initializes the internal cumulative heat value of the electronic thermal O/L relay function. The external thermal operates only when the OH signal is set in Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection). This protective function is not available in the initial status. Differs according to ratings. The rating can be changed using Pr.570 Multiple rating setting.
Three-phase input:
170% for LD rating, 230% for ND rating (initial setting) (FR-E820-0175(3.7K) or lower, FR-E840-0095(3.7K) or lower, FR-E860-0061(3.7K) or lower), and 235% for ND
rating (initial value) (FR-E820-0240(5.5K) or higher, FR-E840-0120(5.5K) or higher, FR-E860-0090(5.5K) or higher)
Single-phase input:
180% for LD rating, 280% for ND rating (initial setting) (FR-E820S-0015(0.2K) or lower), and 230% for ND rating (initial value) (FR-E820S-0030(0.4K) or higher)
Appears when a vector control compatible option is installed.
66
Standard Specifications
Rating
Three-phase 200 V class
Model FR-E820-[]
0008 0015 0030 0050 0080 0110 0175 0240 0330 0470 0600 0760 0900 0.1K 0.2K 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K
Applicable motor capacity (kW)
LD 0.2
0.4
0.75 1.1
2.2
3.0
5.5
7.5
11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0
ND 0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75 1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0
Rated capacity (kVA)
LD 0.5
0.8
1.4
2.4
3.8
4.8
7.8
12.0 15.9 22.3 27.5 35.1 45.8
ND 0.3
0.6
1.2
2.0
3.2
4.4
7.0
9.6
13.1 18.7 23.9 30.3 35.9
Rated current (A)
Output Overload current rating
LD
1.3 (1.1)
2.0 (1.7)
3.5 (3.0)
6.0 (5.1)
9.6 (8.2)
12.0 19.6 30.0 40.0 56.0 69.0 88.0 115.0 (10.2) (16.7) (25.5) (34.0) (47.6) (58.7) (74.8) (97.8)
ND
0.8 (0.8)
1.5 (1.4)
3.0 (2.5)
5.0 (4.1)
8.0 (7.0)
11.0 17.5 24.0 33.0 47.0 60.0 76.0 90.0 (10.0) (16.5) (23.0) (31.0) (44.0) (57.0) (72.0) (86.0)
LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50�C
ND 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50�C
Voltage
Three-phase 200 to 240 V
Regenerative braking
Brake transistor Maximum brake torque (ND reference)
Not installed 150%
Built-in 100%
50% 20%
Rated input AC (DC) voltage/frequency Three-phase 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz (283 to 339 VDC )
Permissible AC (DC) voltage fluctuation 170 to 264 V, 50/60 Hz (240 to 373 VDC )
Permissible frequency fluctuation
�5%
Without DC reactor
Power supply
Rated input current (A)
With DC reactor
LD ND LD ND
1.9 1.4 1.3 0.8
3.0 2.3 2.0 1.5
5.1 4.5 3.5 3.0
8.2 7.0 6.0 5.0
12.5 16.1 25.5 37.1 48.6 74.3 90.5 112.9 139.5
10.7 15.0 23.1 30.5 41.0 63.6 79.9 99.0 114.3
9.6
12.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 56.0 69.0 88.0 115.0
8.0
11.0 17.5 24.0 33.0 47.0 60.0 76.0 90.0
Power supply Without DC reactor
capacity
(kVA)
With DC reactor
LD ND LD ND
0.7 0.5 0.5 0.3
1.1 0.9 0.8 0.6
1.9 1.7 1.3 1.1
3.1 2.7 2.3 1.9
4.8 4.1 3.7 3.0
6.2 5.7 4.6 4.2
9.7 8.8 7.5 6.7
15.0 19.0 29.0 35.0 43.0 54.0
12.0 16.0 25.0 31.0 38.0 44.0
11.0 15.0 21.0 26.0 34.0 44.0
9.1
13.0 18.0 23.0 29.0 34.0
4
Protective structure (IEC 60529)
Open type (IP20)
Cooling system
Natural
Forced air
Approx. mass (kg)
0.5
0.5
0.7
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.8
3.3
3.3
5.4
5.6
11.0 11.0
Standard Specifications
Three-phase 400 V class
Model FR-E840-[]
Applicable motor capacity (kW)
LD ND
Rated capacity (kVA)
LD ND
LD
Rated current (A) ND
Output Overload current rating
LD ND
Voltage
Regenerative braking
Brake transistor Maximum brake torque (ND reference)
Rated input AC (DC) voltage/frequency
Permissible AC (DC) voltage fluctuation
Permissible frequency fluctuation
Without DC reactor
Power supply
Rated input current (A) With DC reactor
LD ND LD ND
Power supply Without DC reactor
capacity
(kVA)
With DC reactor
LD ND LD ND
Protective structure (IEC 60529)
Cooling system
Approx. mass (kg)
0016 0026 0040 0060 0095 0120 0170 0230 0300 0380 0440
0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K
0.75 1.5
2.2
3.0
5.5
7.5
11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0
0.4
0.75 1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0
1.6
2.7
4.2
5.3
8.5
13.3 17.5 26.7 31.2 34.3 45.7
1.2
2.0
3.0
4.6
7.2
9.1
13.0 17.5 22.9 29.0 33.5
2.1 (1.8)
3.5 (3.0)
5.5 (4.7)
6.9 (5.9)
11.1 (9.4)
17.5 23.0 35.0 41.0 45.0 60.0 (14.9) (19.6) (29.8) (34.9) (38.3) (51.0)
1.6 (1.4)
2.6 (2.2)
4.0 (3.8)
6.0 (5.4)
9.5 (8.7)
12.0
17.0
23.0
30.0
38.0
44.0
120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50�C
150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50�C
Three-phase 380 to 480 V
Built-in
100%
50% 20%
Three-phase 380 to 480 V 50/60 Hz (537 to 679VDC )
323 to 528 V, 50/60 Hz (457 to 740VDC )
�5%
3.3
6.0
8.9
10.7 16.2 24.9 32.4 46.7 54.2 59.1 75.6
2.7
4.4
6.7
9.5
14.1 17.8 24.7 32.1 41.0 50.8 57.3
2.1
3.5
5.5
6.9
11.0 18.0 23.0 35.0 41.0 45.0 60.0
1.6
2.6
4.0
6.0
9.5
12.0 17.0 23.0 30.0 38.0 44.0
2.5
4.5
6.8
8.2
12.4 19.0 25.0 36.0 42.0 45.0 58.0
2.1
3.4
5.1
7.2
10.8 14.0 19.0 25.0 32.0 39.0 44.0
1.6
2.7
4.2
5.3
8.5
13.0 18.0 27.0 31.0 34.0 46.0
1.2
2.0
3.0
4.6
7.2
9.1
13.0 18.0 23.0 29.0 34.0
Open type (IP20)
Natural
Forced air
1.2
1.2
1.4
1.8
1.8
2.4
2.4
4.8
4.9
11.0 11.0
The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor. To drive a Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor, use the 200 V class 0.75K inverter for a 1.1 kW motor, or 200/400 V class 2.2K inverter for a 3 kW motor.
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230 V for three-phase 200 V class and 440 V for three-phase 400 V class. The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for the
inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, the pulse
voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about2 that of the power supply. The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which varies with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 60 Hz in the shortest time and
is not a continuous regenerative torque. When the motor is decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency, the average deceleration torque will reduce. Since the inverter does not contain a brake resistor, use the optional brake resistor when regenerative energy is large. A brake unit (FR-BU2) may also be used. (Option brake resistor cannot be used for 0.1K and 0.2K.) The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables). Setting 2 kHz or more in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection to perform low acoustic noise operation in the surrounding air temperature exceeding 40�C, the rated output current is the value in parenthesis. The rated input current is the value when at the rated output current. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables) affect the value. � Connect the DC power supply to the inverter terminals P/+ and N/-. Connect the positive terminal of the power supply to terminal P/+ and the negative terminal to terminal N/-. � When the energy is regenerated from the motor, the voltage between terminals P/+ and N/- may temporarily rise to 415 V or more. Use a DC power supply resistant to the regenerative voltage/energy. When a power supply that cannot resist the regenerative voltage/energy is used, connect a reverse current prevention diode in series. � Powering ON produces up to four times as large current as the inverter rated current. Prepare a DC power supply resistant to the inrush current at power ON, although an inrush current limit circuit is provided in the FR-E800 series inverter. � The power capacity depends on the output impedance of the power supply. Select a power capacity around the AC power supply capacity.
67
Three-phase 575 V class
Model FR-E860-[]
0017 0.75K
0027 1.5K
0040 2.2K
0061 3.7K
0090 5.5K
0120 7.5K
Applicable motor capacity (kW)
LD 1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11.0
ND 0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
Rated capacity (kVA)
LD 2.5
3.6
5.6
8.2
11.0
15.9
ND 1.7
2.7
4.0
6.1
9.0
12.0
Rated current (A)
LD
2.5 (2.1)
ND 1.7
3.6 (3.0) 2.7
5.6 (4.8) 4.0
8.2 (7.0) 6.1
11.0 (9.0) 9.0
16.0 (13.6) 12.0
Output Overload current rating
LD
120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50�C
ND
150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50�C
Voltage
Three-phase 525 to 600 V
Regenerative braking
Brake transistor Maximum brake torque (ND reference)
Built-in 100%
50%
20%
Rated input AC voltage/frequency
Three-phase 575 V 60 Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation
490 to 632 V, 60 Hz
Permissible frequency fluctuation
�5%
Without DC reactor
Power supply
Rated input current (A)
With DC reactor
LD ND LD ND
4.3 3.0 2.5 1.7
5.9 4.6 3.6 2.7
8.9 6.6 5.6 4.0
12.4
15.9
22.4
9.5
13.3
17.4
8.2
11.0
16.0
6.1
9.0
12.0
4
Power supply Without DC reactor
capacity
(kVA)
With DC reactor
LD ND LD ND
4.3 3.0 2.5 1.7
5.9 4.6 3.6 2.7
8.9 6.6 5.6 4.0
12.3
16.0
23.0
9.5
14.0
18.0
8.2
11.0
16.0
6.1
9.0
12.0
Protective structure (IEC 60529)
Open type (IP20)
Cooling system
Natural Forced air
Approx. mass (kg)
1.9
1.9
1.9
2.4
2.4
2.4
Standard Specifications
Single-phase 200 V class
Model FR-E820S-[]
Applicable motor capacity (kW)
ND
Rated capacity (kVA)
ND
Rated current (A)
ND
Output Overload current rating
ND
Voltage
Regenerative braking
Brake transistor Maximum brake torque (ND reference)
Rated input AC voltage/frequency
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation
Permissible frequency fluctuation
Power supply
Rated input current (A)
Without DC reactor With DC reactor
ND
Power supply Without DC reactor
capacity (kVA)
With DC reactor
ND
Protective structure (IEC 60529)
Cooling system
Approx. mass (kg)
0008
0015
0030
0050
0080
0110
0.1K
0.2K
0.4K
0.75K
1.5K
2.2K
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
0.3
0.6
1.2
2.0
3.2
4.4
0.8 (0.8)
1.5 (1.4)
3.0 (2.5)
5.0 (4.1)
8.0 (7.0)
11.0 (10.0)
150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50�C
Three-phase 200 to 240 V
Not installed
Built-in
150%
100%
50%
20%
Single-phase 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
170 to 264 V, 50/60 Hz
�5%
2.3
4.1
7.9
11.2
17.9
25.0
1.4
2.6
5.2
8.7
13.9
19.1
0.5
0.9
1.7
2.5
3.9
5.5
0.3
0.6
1.1
1.9
3.0
4.2
Open type (IP20)
Natural
Forced air
0.5
0.5
0.8
1.3
1.4
1.9
The motor capacity indicates the maximum capacity of a 4-pole standard motor driven by all of the inverters in parallel connection. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 575 V. The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for the
inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, the pulse
voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about2 that of the power supply. The amount of braking torque is the average short-term torque (which varies depending on motor loss) that is generated when a motor decelerates in the shortest time
by itself from 60 Hz. It is not continuous regenerative torque. The average deceleration torque becomes lower when a motor decelerates from a frequency higher than the base frequency. The inverter is not equipped with a built-in brake resistor. Use a brake resistor for an operation with large regenerative power. A brake unit can be also used. The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables). Setting 2 kHz or more in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection to perform low acoustic noise operation in the surrounding air temperature exceeding 40�C, the rated output current is the value in parenthesis. The rated input current indicates a value at a rated output voltage. The impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor and cables) affects the rated input current.
68
Common specifications
Control specifications
Control method
Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control
Induction motor Selectable among V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and Vector control
PM motor
PM sensorless vector control
Output
Induction motor
frequency range PM motor
0.2 to 590 Hz (The upper-limit frequency is 400 Hz under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and Vector control.) 0.2 to 400 Hz (not operable at maximum motor frequency or higher)
Frequency setting resolution
Analog input Digital input
0.015 Hz /60 Hz at 0 to 10 V / 12 bits (terminals 2 and 4) 0.03 Hz /60 Hz at 0 to 5 V / 11 bits or 0 to 20 mA / 11 bits (terminals 2 and 4) 0.01 Hz
Frequency accuracy
Analog input Digital input
Within �0.2% of the max. output frequency (25�C �10�C) Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Voltage/frequency characteristics
Base frequency can be set from 0 to 590 Hz. Constant-torque/variable torque pattern can be selected. (available with induction motors only)
Induction motor Starting torque
PM motor
150% 0.5 Hz (Advanced magnetic flux vector control) 200% 0.3 Hz (0.1K to 3.7K), 150% 0.3 Hz (5.5K or more) (Real sensorless vector control) 50%
Torque boost
Manual torque boost (available with induction motors only)
Acceleration/deceleration time setting
0 to 3600 s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode
DC injection brake
Induction motor PM motor
Operation frequency (0 to 120 Hz), operation time (0 to 10 s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) can be changed. Operation time (0 to 10 s) can be changed, operation voltage (operating current) is fixed.
Stall prevention operation level Torque limit level
Operation current level can be set (0 to 220% adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected. Torque limit value can be set (0 to 400% variable). (Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, PM sensorless vector control)
4
Standard Specifications
Frequency setting signal
Analog input Digital input
Terminals 2 and 4: 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA (0 to 20 mA) are available. Input using the operation panel. Four-digit BCD or 16-bit binary (when used with option FR-A8AX E kit)
Start signal
Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Input signal (standard model: 7, Ethernet model: 2)
Low-speed operation command, Middle-speed operation command, High-speed operation command, Output stop, Forward rotation command, Reverse rotation command, Inverter reset The input signal can be changed using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
Operational functions
Maximum and minimum frequency settings, multi-speed operation, acceleration/deceleration pattern, thermal protection, DC injection brake, starting frequency, JOG operation, output stop (MRS), stall prevention, regeneration avoidance, increased magnetic excitation deceleration, frequency jump, rotation display, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, remote setting, automatic acceleration/deceleration, retry function, carrier frequency selection, fast-response current limit, forward/ reverse rotation prevention, operation mode selection, slip compensation, droop control, speed smoothing control, traverse, auto tuning, applied motor selection, RS-485 communication, Ethernet communication, PID control, easy dancer control, cooling fan operation selection, stop selection (deceleration stop/coasting), power-failure deceleration stop function, stop-oncontact control, PLC function, life diagnosis, maintenance timer, current average monitor, multiple rating, speed control, torque control, torque limit, position control, test operation, safety stop function
Open collector output (standard model: 2) Relay output (1)
Inverter running, Up to frequency, Fault The output signal can be changed using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection).
Operation specifications Output signal
Analog output (AM type)
-10 to +10 V / 12 bits
Protective/warning function
Protective functions
Overcurrent trip during acceleration, Overcurrent trip during constant speed, Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop, Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration, Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed, Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop, Inverter overload trip, Motor overload trip, Heat sink overheat, Undervoltage, Input phase loss, Stall prevention stop, Loss of synchronism detection, Upper limit fault detection, Lower limit fault detection, Brake transistor alarm detection, Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, Output short circuit, Output phase loss, External thermal relay operation, PTC thermistor operation, Option fault, Communication option fault, Parameter storage device fault, PU disconnection, Retry count excess, CPU fault, Abnormal output current detection, Inrush current limit circuit fault, USB communication fault, analog input error, Safety circuit fault, Overspeed occurrence, Speed deviation excess detection, Excessive position fault, Brake sequence fault, Acceleration error, PID signal fault, Ethernet communication fault, Opposite rotation deceleration fault, Internal circuit fault, User definition error by the PLC function, Board combination mismatch
Warning functions
Fan alarm, Stall prevention (overcurrent), Stall prevention (overvoltage), Regenerative brake pre-alarm, Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU stop, Maintenance timer warning, Parameter write error, Operation panel lock, Password locked, Speed limit indication, Stroke limit warning, Home position return setting error, Home position return uncompleted, Safety stop, Ethernet communication fault,Duplicate IP address, IP address fault, Incorrect parameter setting
Surrounding air temperature
-20�C to +60�C (-10�C to +60�C for the 575 V class) (The rated current must be reduced at a temperature above 50�C.)
Environment
Ambient humidity
95% RH or less (non-condensing) (With circuit board coating (conforming to IEC 60721-3-3 3C2)) 90% RH or less (non-condensing) (Without circuit board coating)
Storage temperature
-40�C to +70�C
Atmosphere
Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt, etc.)
Altitude/vibration
Maximum 3000 m (Maximum 2000 m for the 575 V class), 5.9 m/s2 or less at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
Available when a Vector control compatible option (FR-A8AP E kit) is installed. Enabled only for standard models. Available for the Ethernet model and the safety communication model. Available for the three-phase power input model. This protective function is not available in the initial status. Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit. For the installation at an altitude above 1000 m, consider a 3% reduction in the rated current per 500 m increase in altitude.
69
PLC function specifications
The following table shows the program capacity and devices of the PLC function.
Item
E800 PLC function specifications
Control method
Repeated operation (by stored program)
I/O control mode
Refresh
Programming language
Relay symbolic language (ladder) Logic symbolic language Function block Structured text (ST)
Sequence instructions
25
No. of instructions
Basic instructions
88
Application instructions
37
Processing speed
Sequence instructions 1.9 s to 12 s/step
Number of I/O device points
288 (input: 144 points, output: 144 points) For FR-E800 series: 10 points built-in (input: 7 points, output: 3 points) For FR-E800-E series: 3 points built-in (input: 2 points, output: 1 point) For FR-E800-SCE series: 1 point built-in (output: 1 point) FR-A8AX (input: 16 points) FR-A8AY (output: 7 points) FR-A8AR (output: 3 points)
Number of analog I/O points
2 input points built-in (Terminals 2 and 4) 2 output points built-in (Terminals FM and AM), FR-A8AY: 2 output points (Terminals AM0 and AM1)
Watchdog timer
10 to 2000 ms
Program capacity
2K steps (8k bytes) (0 to 2048 steps can be set), contained in one program
Internal relay (M)
128 (M0 to M127)
4
Latch relay (L) Timer (T)
Number of points Specifications
Not used (Can be set with parameters but will not latch) 16 (T0 to T15) 100 ms timer: 0.1 to 3276.7 s can be set 10 ms timer: 0.01 to 327.67 s can be set
Device
Retentive timer (ST)
Number of points Specifications Number of points
16 (ST0 to ST15) 100 ms retentive timer: 0.1 to 3276.7 s can be set 10 ms retentive timer: 0.01 to 327.67 s can be set 16 (C0 to C15)
Counter (C)
Specifications
Normal counter: Setting range 1 to 32767 Interrupt program counter: Not used
Data register (D)
256 (D0 to D255)
Pointer (P)
256 points (P0 to P127, P2048 to P2175) (All are common pointers.)
Special relay (SM)
2048 (SM0 to SM2047) with limited functions
Special register (SD)
2048 (SD0 to SD2047) with limited functions
Standard Specifications
The scan time is approximately 40 ms for 1K steps as inverter control is also performed in actual operations. The signals same as the ones assigned to the inverter I/O terminals are used. One point is always required for a sequence start (RUN/STOP). There is no device latch function for power failures. Use the Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 PLC function user parameters 1 to 50 (D206 to D255) to store device values in the
EEPROM. P2048 to P2175 are used for automatic assignment. For details of automatic assignment, refer to GX Works2 Operating Manual (Simple Project). The initial value is "0".
NOTE
� There is no buffer memory.
70
Amount of heat generated by the inverter
When the heat sink is installed, the amount of heat generated by the inverter unit is shown in the following table.
Voltage
Inverter model
Amount of heat generated (W)
Standard model
Ethernet model / Safety communication model
LD
ND
LD
ND
FR-E820-0008(0.1K)
16
11
17
12
FR-E820-0015(0.2K)
21
16
22
17
FR-E820-0030(0.4K)
35
29
36
30
FR-E820-0050(0.75K)
61
48
62
49
FR-E820-0080(1.5K)
91
74
92
75
Three-phase 200 V class
FR-E820-0110(2.2K) FR-E820-0175(3.7K) FR-E820-0240(5.5K)
107
91
108
92
177
153
178
154
251
191
252
192
FR-E820-0330(7.5K)
317
249
318
250
FR-E820-0470(11K)
426
341
427
342
FR-E820-0600(15K)
547
414
548
415
FR-E820-0760(18.5K)
735
600
736
601
FR-E820-0900(22K)
1063
745
1064
746
4
FR-E840-0016(0.4K)
33
25
34
26
Standard Specifications
FR-E840-0026(0.75K)
55
38
56
39
FR-E840-0040(1.5K)
84
58
85
59
FR-E840-0060(2.2K)
88
75
89
76
Three-phase 400 V class
FR-E840-0095(3.7K) FR-E840-0120(5.5K) FR-E840-0170(7.5K)
136
112
137
113
223
136
224
137
299
197
300
198
FR-E840-0230(11K)
410
239
411
240
FR-E840-0300(15K)
486
321
487
322
FR-E840-0380(18.5K)
510
348
511
349
FR-E840-0440(22K)
589
401
590
402
FR-E860-0017(0.75K)
39
32
40
33
FR-E860-0027(1.5K)
48
38
49
39
Three-phase 575 V FR-E860-0040(2.2K)
class
FR-E860-0061(3.7K)
71
52
72
53
103
76
104
77
FR-E860-0090(5.5K)
128
103
129
104
FR-E860-0120(7.5K)
178
127
179
128
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K)
-
11
-
12
FR-E820S-0015(0.2K)
-
17
-
18
Single-phase 200 V FR-E820S-0030(0.4K)
class
FR-E820S-0050(0.75K)
-
32
-
33
-
49
-
50
FR-E820S-0080(1.5K)
-
80
-
81
FR-E820S-0110(2.2K)
-
95
-
96
Inverter specifications are as follows. Output current: inverter rated current
Power supply voltage: 220 V for the 200 V class, 440 V for the 400 V class, and 575 V for the 575 V class
Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
71
Outline Dimensions
� FR-E820-0.1K to 0.75K � FR-E820S-0.1K to 0.4K
C
When used with the plug-in option
H1 H
W1 W � FR-E820-1.5K to 22K � FR-E840-0.4K to 22K � FR-E860-0.75K to 7.5K � FR-E820S-0.75K to 2.2K
5
D1 D
D1 D2
When used with the plug-in option
H1 H
C
Outline Dimensions
W1
D1
D1
W
D
D2
� Three-phase 200 V class
Inverter model W W1 H
FR-E820-0.1K
FR-E820-0.2K FR-E820-0.4K
68 56
FR-E820-0.75K
128
FR-E820-1.5K FR-E820-2.2K
108 96
FR-E820-3.7K
140 128
FR-E820-5.5K FR-E820-7.5K FR-E820-11K FR-E820-15K FR-E820-18.5K FR-E820-22K
180 164 260
195 220
200 350
H1 D D1 D2 C
80.5 10 108.1
118
112.5 132.5
42
140.1 160.1 5
135.5 46 163.1
142.5 52.5 170.1
165 71.5 192.6
244
6
190 84.7 217.6
330
10
� Three-phase 400 V class
Inverter model W W1 H
FR-E840-0.4K
FR-E840-0.75K 108 96 128
FR-E840-1.5K
FR-E840-2.2K FR-E840-3.7K
140 128 150
FR-E840-5.5K FR-E840-7.5K
208 150
FR-E840-11K FR-E840-15K
220 195 260
FR-E840-18.5K FR-E840-22K
200 350
H1 D D1 D2 C
118 129.5 40 157.1 46
138 135 43.5 162.6 5
138 147 68 174.6
244
6
190 84.7 217.6
330
10
� Three-phase 575 V class
Inverter model W W1 H
FR-E860-0.75K
FR-E860-1.5K
140 128
FR-E860-2.2K FR-E860-3.7K
150
FR-E860-5.5K
220 208
FR-E860-7.5K
H1 D
135 138
147
D1 D2 C
43.5 162.6 5
68 174.6
� Single-phase 200 V class
Inverter model W W1 H
FR-E820S-0.1K
FR-E820S-0.2K 68 56
FR-E820S-0.4K FR-E820S-0.75K FR-E820S-1.5K
108 96
128
FR-E820S-2.2K 140 128
H1 D D1 D2 C
80.5 10 108.1
118
142.5 42 135 45.5
170.1 162.6
5
161 46 188.6
142.5 52.5 170.1
(Unit: mm)
72
MEMO
73
Terminal Connection Diagram
Sink logic
Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal
Single-phase power input
MCCB
MC
Single-phase AC power supply
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB
MC
When connecting a DC reactor, remove the jumper across P1 and P/+.
R/L1 S/L2
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Earth (Ground)
Jumper
Brake unit (Option)
R
PR N/-
P1
P/+
R/L1
U
S/L2
V
T/L3
W
A brake transistor is not built-in to FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0016(0.2K).
Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type) Install a thermal relay to prevent an overheat and burnout of the brake resistor. (The brake resistor can not be connected to FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0016(0.2K).)
Motor
M
Earth (Ground)
Main circuit Control circuit
Earth (Ground)
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)
Terminal functions vary with the input terminal assignment (Pr. 178 to Pr. 184)
Forward rotation start Reverse
STF STR
rotation start
The initial setting varies
RH
depending on the specification.
High
speed
Multi-speed
RM
Source logic
selection
Middle speed
S
RL
SOURCE SINK
Low
RES
SINK
speed
MRS
SD
Output stop
SOURCE SINK
RES
SINK
6
SOURCE 24V
Reset Contact input
SD
PC
common 24VDC power supply(Common for
SOURCE 24V
external power supply transistor) PC
Safety stop input common Safety stop input (Channel 1)
Safety stop input (Channel 2) Shorting wire
S1 Output
S2 shutoff
circuit
C
Relay output
Terminal functions vary by
B
Relay output Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal
(Fault output) function selection
A
RUN FU
Open collector output
Running
Terminal functions vary with the output terminal assignment (Pr. 190 and Pr. 191)
Frequency detection
SE
Open collector output common
Sink/source common
SO SOC
Safety stop signal Safety monitor output
Safety monitor output common
Frequency setting signals (Analog)
Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specifications switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). Set the voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select voltage input and "I" to select current input . The initial setting varies depending on the specification.
It is recommended to use 2W1k when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.
3
Frequency setting
potentiometer
2
1/2W1k
1
Terminal 4 input (+) (Current input) (-)
Connector for plug-in option connection
10(+5V)
2 0 to 5VDC
0 to 10VDC 0 to 20mADC
5(Analog common)
PU connector
USB mini B connector
4 4 to 20mADC
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC
2 VI
4
Voltage/current input switch
Output signal: Pulse or analog selectable Output signal: Pulse (FM type only)
Calibration
resistor +
FM
SD
Indicator
- (Frequency meter, etc.)
Moving-coil type 1mA full-scale
AM 5
It is not necessary when calibrating the indicator from the operation panel.
Output signal: Analog (AM type only) (+) Analog signal output (-) (0 to �10VDC)
Option connector
Terminal Connection Diagram, Terminal Specifications
74
Terminal Specifications
input signal Frequency setting
output signal Analog Pulse Open collector Relay
Main circuit
Type
Terminal Symbol
Common
Terminal Name
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
AC power input
U, V, W
Inverter output
P/+, PR
Brake resistor connection
P/+, N/-
Brake unit connection
P/+, P1
DC reactor connection
Description
Connect to the commercial power supply. Do not connect anything to these terminals when using the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) or the multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC) in common bus regeneration mode. Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor or PM motor. Connect a brake transistor (MRS type, MYS type, FR-ABR) across terminals P/+-PR. (The brake resistor cannot be connected to the 0.1K or 0.2K) Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC), or high power factor converter (FR-HC2). Remove the jumper across terminals P/+-P1 and connect a DC reactor. When a DC reactor is not connected, the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 should not be removed.
Earth (Ground)
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).
Contact input
STF
Forward rotation start
Turn on the STF signal to start forward When the STF and STR
rotation and turn it off to stop.
signals are turned on
STR
SD (sink
Reverse rotation start
Turn on the STR signal to start reverse simultaneously, the stop
rotation and turn it off to stop.
command is given.
RH, RM, RL
(negative common))
Multi-speed selection
Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH, RM Input resistance: 4.7 k,
and RL signals.
voltage when contacts are open:
MRS RES
PC (source (positive common))
Output stop Reset
Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter output. Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by electromagnetic brake.
21 to 26 VDC, current when contacts are short-circuited: 4 to 6 mADC
Use to reset alarm output provided when protective circuit is activated. Turn
on the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then turn it off. It is possible to set the
initial setting to "always enabled". By setting Pr. 75, reset can be set
enabled only at fault occurrence. Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.
10
5
Frequency setting power Used as power supply when connecting potentiometer for frequency 5 VDC � 0.5 V
supply
setting (speed setting) from outside of the inverter.
permissible load current 10 mA
Inputting 0 to 5 VDC (or 0 to 10 VDC) provides the maximum output frequency
at 5 V (or 10 V) and makes input and output proportional.
2
5
Frequency setting (voltage) Use Pr.73 to switch between input 0 to 5 VDC (initial setting) and 0 to 10 VDC
input (The initial setting varies depending on the specification) . Set the voltage/ Voltage input:
current input switch to the "I" position to select current input (0 to 20 mA).
Input resistance 10 k � 1 k
Inputting 4 to 20 mADC (or 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC) provides the maximum Permissible maximum voltage
output frequency at 20 mA and makes input and output proportional. This 20 VDC
input signal is valid only when the AU signal is ON (terminal 2 input is
Current input:
invalid). To use the terminal 4 (current input at initial setting), assign "4" to Input resistance 245 � 5
4
5
Frequency setting (current) any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection) Maximum permissible current
before turning ON the AU signal (The initial setting varies depending on the 30 mA.
specification) . Use Pr.267 to switch among input 4 to 20 mA (initial setting), 0 to 5 VDC, and 0 to 10 VDC. Set the voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select voltage input (0 to 5 V / 0 to 10 V).
6
A, B, C
1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter fault occurs. Relay output (fault output) Fault: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across A-C), Normal:
continuity across B-C (discontinuity across A-C)
Contact capacity 240 VAC 2A (power factor = 0.4) 30 VDC 1A
The output is in LOW state when the inverter output frequency is equal
RUN
SE
Inverter running
to or higher than the starting frequency (initial value: 0.5 Hz). The output is in HIGH state during stop or DC injection brake operation.
Permissible load 24 VDC (Maximum 27 VDC) 0.1 A
The output is in LOW state when the inverter output frequency is equal (a voltage drop is 3.4 V
FU
SE
Frequency detection
to or higher than the preset detection frequency, and is in HIGH state maximum when the signal is on)
when it is less than the preset detection frequency.
Terminal Connection Diagram, Terminal Specifications
FM
SD
AM
5
S1
PC
S2
PC
SO
SOC
SD
PC
SD
5
SE
SOC
For meter Analog voltage output
Select one e.g. output frequency from monitor items. (Not output during inverter reset.) The output signal is proportional to the magnitude of the corresponding
Output item: output frequency (initial setting)
Permissible load current 1 mA 1440 pulses/s at 60 Hz Output signal 0 to �10 VDC, permissible load current 1 mA
monitoring item.
(load impedance 10 k or more),
resolution: 12 bits
Safety stop input (Channel 1) Safety stop input (with 24 VDC input) (Channel 2)
Terminals S1 and S2 are used for the safety stop input signal for the safety relay module. Terminals S1 and S2 are used at the same time (dual channel). Inverter output is shutoff by shortening/opening between terminals S1 and SIC, or between S2 and SIC. In the initial status, terminals S1 and S2 are shorted with terminal PC by shorting wires. Terminal SIC is shorted with terminal SD. Remove the shorting wires and connect the safety relay module when using the safety stop function.
Input resistance 4.7 k Voltage when contacts are 21 to 26 VDC Current when contacts are short-circuited 4 to 6 mADC
open
Safety monitor output (open collector output)
Indicates the safety stop input signal status. Switched to LOW when the status is other than the internal safety circuit failure. Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Functional Safety) (BCN-A23488-000) when the signal is switched to HIGH while both terminals S1 and S2 are open. (Please contact your sales representative for the manual.)
Permissible load 24 VDC (maximum 27 VDC) 0.1 A (The voltage drop is 3.4 V at maximum while the signal is ON.)
Contact input common (sink (negative common))
Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal FM.
External transistor common Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector output) (source (positive common)) device, such as a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by undesirable currents.
24VDC power supply common
Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC terminal). Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a
External transistor common transistor output (open collector output) device, such as a
(sink (negative common)) programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid malfunction by
undesirable currents.
Safety stop input terminal common
Common terminal for safety stop input terminals.
Contact input common (source (positive common))
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).
Power supply voltage range: 22 to 26.5 VDC, permissible load current: 100 mA
24VDC power supply
Can be used as 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply.
Frequency setting common Common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2 or 4) and terminal AM. Do not earth (ground).
Open collector output common
Common terminal of terminal RUN and FU.
Safety monitor output terminal common
Common terminal for terminal SO.
PU connector
With the PU connector, RS-485 communication can be made.
� Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)
� Transmission format: Multi-drop link
� Communication speed: 300 to 115200bps
� Overall extension: 500m
USB connector
USB connection with a personal computer can be established. Setting, monitoring and testing of the inverter
can be performed using FR Configurator2.
� Interface: conforms to USB 1.1
� Transmission Speed: 12 Mbps
� Connector: USB mini B connector (receptacle mini B type)
Safety stop signal
Common terminal
Communication
Terminal T/L3 is not available for the single-phase power input models. Terminal functions can be selected using Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection). An open collector transistor is ON (conductive) in LOW state. The transistor is OFF (not conductive) in HIGH state. Terminal FM is provided for the FM type inverter. Terminal AM is provided for the AM type inverter. USB bus power connection is available. The maximum SCCR is 500 mA. A PU connector cannot be used during USB bus power connection.
75
Terminal Connection Diagram
Sink logic
Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal
Single-phase power input
MCCB
MC
Single-phase AC power supply
MCCB
MC
Three-phase AC power supply
When connecting a DC reactor, remove the jumper across P1 and P/+.
R/L1 S/L2
Earth (Ground)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Jumper
Brake unit (Option)
R
PR N/-
P1
P/+
R/L1
U
S/L2
V
T/L3
W
A brake transistor is not built-in to FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0016(0.2K).
Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type) Install a thermal relay to prevent an overheat and burnout of the brake resistor. (The brake resistor can not be connected to FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0016(0.2K).)
Motor
M
Earth (Ground)
Main circuit Control circuit
Earth (Ground)
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)
Terminal functions vary with the input terminal assignment (Pr. 178 and Pr. 184)
Source logic
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start
SOURCE SINK
The initial setting
SINK
varies depending on
the specification.
SD SOURCE 24V
Contact input common
PC
24VDC power supply(Common for
external power supply transistor)
DI0 DI1
SOURCE
SD PC
SINK SINK
SOURCE 24V
C
Relay output
Terminal functions vary by
B
Relay output Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal
(Fault output) function selection
A
6
Safety stop input common Safety stop input (Channel 1)
Safety stop input (Channel 2)
S1 Output
S2 shutoff
SO Safety monitor output
Safety stop signal
Shorting wire
circuit
SOC Safety monitor output common
Frequency setting signals (Analog)
Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specifications switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). Set the voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select voltage input and "I" to select current input . The initial setting varies depending on the specification.
It is recommended to use 2W1k when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.
3
Frequency
setting potentiometer
2
1/2W1k
1
Terminal 4 input (+) (Current input) (-)
Connector for plug-in option connection
10(+5V)
2 0 to 5VDC
0 to 5VDC 0 to 20mADC
5(Analog common)
Ethernet connector (2 ports)
USB mini B connector
4 4 to 20mADC
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC
2 7*
4
Voltage/current input switch
Option connector
Terminal Connection Diagram, Terminal Specifications
76
Terminal Specifications
input signal Frequency setting
output signal Relay
Type
Terminal Symbol
Common
Terminal Name
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
AC power input
U, V, W
Inverter output
P/+, PR
Brake resistor connection
Main circuit
P/+, N/-
Brake unit connection
P/+, P1
DC reactor connection
Description
Connect to the commercial power supply. Do not connect anything to these terminals when using the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) or the multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC) in common bus regeneration mode. Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor or PM motor. Connect a brake transistor (MRS type, MYS type, FR-ABR) across terminals P/+-PR. (The brake resistor cannot be connected to the 0.1K or 0.2K) Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC), or high power factor converter (FR-HC2). Remove the jumper across terminals P/+-P1 and connect a DC reactor. When a DC reactor is not connected, the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 should not be removed.
Earth (Ground)
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).
Contact input
DI0 DI1
SD (sink (negative common)) PC (source (positive
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start
Turn on the DI0 signal to start forward rotation and turn it off to stop. Turn on the DI1 signal to start reverse rotation and turn it off to stop.
Input resistance: 4.7 k, When the DI0 and DI1 signals voltage when contacts are open: are turned on simultaneously, 21 to 26 VDC, the stop command is given. current when contacts are
short-circuited: 4 to 6 mADC
common))
10
5
Frequency setting power supply
Used as power supply when connecting potentiometer for frequency setting (speed setting) from outside of the inverter.
5 VDC � 0.5 V permissible load current 10 mA
Inputting 0 to 5 VDC (or 0 to 10 V) provides the maximum output frequency at
5 V (10 V) and makes input and output proportional.
2
5
Frequency setting (voltage)
Use Pr. 73 to switch between input 0 to 5 VDC (initial setting) and 0 to 10 VDC input (The initial setting varies depending on the specification). Set the
Voltage input:
voltage/current input switch to the "I" position to select current input (0 to 20 mA).
Input resistance 10 k � 1 k Permissible maximum voltage
4
5
Frequency setting (current)
Inputting 0 to 20 mADC (or 0 to 5 V / 0 to 10 V) provides the maximum output frequency at 20 mA makes input and output proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is on (terminal 2 input is invalid). To use terminal 4 (initial setting is current input), set "4" to any of Pr.178, Pr.179 (input terminal function selection), and turn AU signal
20 VDC Current input: Input resistance 245 � 5 Maximum permissible current
ON (The initial setting varies depending on the specification). Use Pr. 30 mA.
267 to switch from among input 4 to 20 mA (initial setting), 0 to 5 VDC
and 0 to 10 VDC. Set the voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select voltage input (0 to 5 V / 0 to 10 V).
6
Terminal Connection Diagram, Terminal Specifications
A, B, C
1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter fault occurs. Relay output (fault output) Fault: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across A-C),
Normal: continuity across B-C (discontinuity across A-C)
Contact capacity 240 VAC 2 A (power factor = 0.4) 30 VDC 1 A
Safety stop signal
Common terminal
S1 S2 SO
SD
PC 5 SOC
PC PC
SOC
SD
Safety stop input (Channel 1)
Safety stop input (with 24 VDC input) (Channel 2)
Terminals S1 and S2 are used for the safety stop input signal for the safety relay module. Terminals S1 and S2 are used at the same time (dual channel). Inverter output is shutoff by shortening/opening between
Input resistance 4.7 k Voltage when contacts are open
terminals S1 and SIC, or between S2 and SIC. In the initial status,
21 to 26 VDC
terminals S1 and S2 are shorted with terminal PC by shorting wires. Current when contacts are
Terminal SIC is shorted with terminal SD. Remove the shorting wires and connect the safety relay module when using the safety stop function.
short-circuited 4 to 6 mADC
Safety monitor output (open collector output)
Indicates the safety stop input signal status.
Switched to LOW when the status is other than the internal safety circuit failure. Switched to HIGH during the internal safety circuit failure status. (LOW is when the open collector output transistor is ON (conducted). HIGH is when the transistor is OFF (not conducted).) Refer to the FRE800 Instruction Manual (Functional Safety) (BCN-A23488-000) when
Permissible load 24 VDC (maximum 27 VDC) 0.1 A (The voltage drop is 3.4 V at
the signal is switched to HIGH while both terminals S1 and S2 are open. maximum while the signal is ON.)
(Please contact your sales representative for the manual.)
Contact input common (sink (negative common))
Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic).
External transistor common Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector output) (source (positive common)) device, such as a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by undesirable current.
24 VDC power supply common
Common output terminal for 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply (PC terminal). Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a External transistor common transistor output (open collector output) device, such as a (sink (negative common)) programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid malfunction by
undesirable current.
Safety stop input terminal common
Common terminal for safety stop input terminals.
Power supply voltage range: 22 to 26.5 VDC, permissible load current: 100 mA
Contact input common (source (positive common))
Common terminal for the contact input terminal (source logic).
24 VDC power supply
Can be used as 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply.
Frequency setting common Common terminal for the frequency setting signals (terminals 2 or 4). Do not earth (ground).
Safety monitor output terminal common
Common terminal for terminal SO.
Ethernet connector (2-port)
Communication can be made via Ethernet. � Category: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T � Data transmission speed: 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX) / 10 Mbps (10BASE-T) � Transmission method: Baseband � Maximum segment length: 100m between the hub and the inverter � Number of cascade connection stages: Up to 2 (100BASE-TX) / up to 4 (10BASE-T) � Interface: RJ-45 � Number of interfaces available: 2 � IP version: IPv4
USB connector
USB connection with a personal computer can be established. Setting, monitoring and testing of the inverter
can be performed using FR Configurator2.
� Interface: conforms to USB 1.1
� Transmission Speed: 12 Mbps
� Connector: USB mini B connector (receptacle mini B type)
Communication
Terminal T/L3 is not available for the single-phase power input models. Terminal functions can be selected using Pr.178, Pr.179 (Input terminal function selection). Do not connect the parameter unit. The inverter may be damaged. USB bus power connection is available. The maximum SCCR should be 500 mA.
77
Terminal Connection Diagram
Source logic
Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal
Single-phase power input
MCCB
MC
Single-phase AC power supply
MCCB
MC
Three-phase AC power supply
When connecting a DC reactor, remove the jumper across P1 and P/+.
R/L1 S/L2
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Earth (Ground)
Jumper
Brake unit (Option)
R
PR N/-
P1
P/+
R/L1
U
S/L2
V
T/L3
W
A brake transistor is not built-in to FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K).
Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type) Install a thermal relay to prevent an overheat and burnout of the brake resistor. (The brake resistor can not be connected to FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K).)
Motor
M
Earth (Ground)
Main circuit Control circuit
Earth (Ground)
C
Relay output
Terminal functions vary by
B
Relay output Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal
(Fault output) function selection
A
Terminal Connection Diagram, Terminal Specifications
6 24 VDC power supply Safety input terminal common
24V PC
Safety input/output signal SY1
Safety output (channel 1)
Safety input (channel 1)
SX1
SC1 Safety output common (channel 1)
Safety input (channel 2)
SX2
24 VDC power supply common SD
SY2 Safety output (channel 2)
SC2 Safety output common (channel 2)
Frequency setting signals (Analog)
Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specifications
Frequency setting
3
switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). potentiometer
2
Set the voltage/current input 1/2W1k
switch in the "V" position to
select voltage input and "I"
1
to select current input.
The initial setting varies
depending on the
Terminal 4 input (+)
specification.
(Current input) (-)
It is recommended to use 2W1k when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.
Connector for plug-in option connection
10(+5V)
2 0 to 5VDC
0 to 5VDC 0 to 20mADC
5(Analog common)
Ethernet connector
Ethernet connector
USB mini B connector
4 4 to 20mADC
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC
2 VI
4
Voltage/current input switch
Option connector
78
Terminal Specifications
input signal Frequency setting
output signal Relay
Type
Terminal Symbol
Common
Terminal Name
Description
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
AC power input
Connected to the commercial power supply.
U, V, W
Inverter output
Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor or PM motor.
Connect an optional brake transistor (MRS, MYS, FR-ABR) between terminal P/+ and PR. (Not
Main circuit
P/+, PR
Brake resistor connection available for FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-
0015(0.2K).)
P/+, N/-
Brake unit connection
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, or BU) or the multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC in power regeneration mode) to these terminals.
P/+, P1
DC reactor connection
Remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1, and connect a DC reactor. When a DC reactor is not connected, the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 should not be removed.
Earth (Ground)
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Be sure to earth (ground) the inverter.
10
5
2
5
4
5
A, B, C
Frequency setting power Used as the power supply for an external frequency setting
5 �0.5 VDC,
supply
(speed setting) potentiometer.
Permissible load current: 10 mA
Inputting 0 to 5 VDC (or 0 to 10 VDC) provides the maximum
output frequency at 5 V (or 10 V) and makes input and output
Frequency setting (voltage)
proportional. Use Pr.73 to switch among input 0 to 5 VDC (initial setting), 0 to 10 VDC, and 0 to 20 mA. * The initial setting varies depending on the specification.
Set the voltage/current input switch to the "I" position to select For voltage input,
current input (0 to 20 mA).
Input resistance: 10 �1 k
Inputting 4 to 20 mADC (or 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC) provides Maximum permissible voltage:
the maximum output frequency at 20 mA and makes input and 20 VDC
output proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU For current input,
signal is ON (terminal 2 input is invalid).
Input resistance: 245 �5
Frequency setting (current)
To use terminal 4 (current input at initial setting), assign "4" to Permissible maximum current: Pr.178 or Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) before turning 30 mA ON the AU signal. * The initial setting varies depending on the
specification.
Use Pr.267 to switch among input 4 to 20 mA (initial setting), 0 to
5 VDC, and 0 to 10 VDC. Set the voltage/current input switch in
the "V" position to select voltage input (0 to 5 V / 0 to 10 V). 1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter protective
6
Relay
output
(fault
output)
function has activated and Fault: discontinuity across
the outputs are stopped. B and C (continuity across
A
and
C),
Contact capacity: 240 VAC 2A (power factor = 0.4) or 30 VDC 1 A
Normal: continuity across B and C (discontinuity across A and C)
signal
Terminal Connection Diagram, Terminal Specifications
SX1
PC
SX2
PC
Safety input (channel 1) Terminal functions can be selected using Pr.S051 SX1/SX2 terminal function selection. Safety input (channel 2) For details, refer to the FR-E800-SCE Instruction Manual (Functional Safety).
stop
Safety
Common terminal
SY1
SC1
Safety output (channel 1) Terminal functions can be selected using Pr.S055 SY1/SY2 terminal function selection.
SY2
SC2
Safety output (channel 2) For details, refer to the FR-E800-SCE Instruction Manual (Functional Safety).
SD
PC
SD
5
SC1
SC2
24 VDC power supply
common
External transistor
Common output terminal for 24 VDC 0.1A power supply (terminal PC). Isolated from terminal 5.
common (source (positive
common))
Safety input terminal common
Common terminal for terminals SX1 and SX2.
Power supply voltage range: 22 to 26.5 VDC
24 VDC power supply Can be used as a 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply.
Permissible load current: 100 mA
Frequency setting common
Common terminal for the frequency setting signal (terminal 2 or 4). Do not earth (ground).
Safety output common
(channel 1) Safety output common
For details, refer to the FR-E800-SCE Instruction Manual (Functional Safety).
(channel 2)
Communication can be made via Ethernet.
� Category: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T� Transmission method: Baseband
Ethernet connector
� Data transmission speed: 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX) / 10 Mbps (10BASE-T)
(2-port)
� Maximum segment length: 100 m between the hub and the inverter� Interface: RJ-45
� Number of cascade connection stages: Up to 2 (100BASE-TX) / up to 4 (10BASE-T)
� Number of interfaces available: 2� IP version: IPv4
By connecting an inverter to the personal computer through USB, FR Configurator2 can be used for
USB connector
setting the inverter and monitoring the operation.
� Interface: conforms to USB 1.1
� Transmission speed: 12 Mbps
� Connector: USB mini B connector (receptacle mini B type)
Communication
Terminal T/L3 is not available for the single-phase power input models. Do not connect the parameter unit. The inverter may be damaged. USB bus power connection is available. The maximum SCCR should be 500 mA.
79
Example Connections
(b) Three-phase AC power supply
(c) Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage current breaker (ELB), fuse
(a) Inverter
(d) Magnetic contactor (MC)
(n) USB power supply USB device (Mini B connector)
Personal computer (FR Configurator2)
(e) AC reactor (FR-HAL)
(f) DC reactor (FR-HEL)
(o) Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS)
P/+ PR
IM connection
PM connection
U VW
U VW
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
7
P/+ P1
P/+ N/- Earth (Ground)
(g) Noise filter (FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
(p) Noise filter (ferrite core) (FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
(h) Radio noise filter (FR-BIF)
(r) Contactor Example) No-fuse switch (DSN type)
Example Connections
(l) Brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU)
P/+ PR P/+ PR
(i) High power factor converter (FR-HC2)
(j) Multifunction regeneration (m) Resistor unit (FR-BR),
converter (FR-XC)
Discharging resistor
(k) Power regeneration
(GZG, GRZG)
common converter (FR-CV)
(q) Induction motor
Earth (Ground)
(s) PM motor
Earth (Ground) : Install these options as required.
80
Symbol
Name
Overview
The life of the inverter is influenced by the surrounding air temperature.
The surrounding air temperature should be as low as possible within the
(a)
Inverter (FR-E800)
permissible range. This must be noted especially when the inverter is installed in an enclosure.
Incorrect wiring may lead to damage of the inverter. The control signal lines
must be kept fully away from the main circuit lines to protect them from noise.
(b)
Three-phase AC power supply
Must be within the permissible power supply specifications of the inverter.
(c)
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), earth Must be selected carefully since an inrush current flows in the inverter at power
leakage circuit breaker (ELB), or fuse
ON.
Install this to ensure safety.
(d)
Magnetic contactor (MC)
Do not use this to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will shorten the life of the
inverter.
Install this to suppress harmonics and to improve the power factor.
An AC reactor (FR-HAL) (option) is required when installing the inverter near a
(e)
AC reactor (FR-HAL)
large power supply system (500 kVA or more). Under such condition, the
inverter may be damaged if you do not use a reactor.
Select a reactor according to the applied motor capacity.
Install this to suppress harmonics and to improve the power factor.
(f)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Select a reactor according to the applied motor capacity. When using a DC reactor, remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1
before connecting a DC reactor to the inverter.
(g)
Noise filter (ferrite core) (FR-BSF01, FRBLF) Install this to reduce the electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter.
(h)
Radio noise filter (FR-BIF)
Install this to reduce the radio noise.
(i)
High power factor converter (FR-HC2)
Suppresses the power supply harmonics significantly. Install this as required.
(j)
Multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC)
(k)
Power regeneration common converter (FR- Provides a large braking capability. Install this as required. CV)
(l) (m)
Brake unit (FR-BU2) Resistor unit (FR-BR), discharge resistor (GZG, GRZG)
Allows the inverter to provide the optimal regenerative braking capability. Install this as required.
(n)
USB connection
(o)
Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS)
Connect between the inverter and a personal computer with a USB (ver. 1.1) cable. Increases the braking capability. (0.4K or higher)
7
Install this to reduce the electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter. The
(p)
Noise filter (ferrite core) (FR-BSF01, FR-BLF) noise filter is effective in the range from about 0.5 to 5 MHz. A wire should be
wound four turns at maximum.
(q)
Induction motor
Connect a squirrel-cage induction motor.
(r)
Example) No-fuse switch (DSN type)
Connect this for an application where a PM motor is driven by the load even while the inverter power is OFF. Do not open or close the contactor while the inverter is running (outputting).
(s)
PM motor
An IPM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.
Not available for the FR-E800-SCE. Only the FR-XC in power regeneration mode is available for the FR-E800-SCE.
Example Connections
NOTE
� To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground) the motor and inverter. � Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor, or capacitor type filter on the inverter's output side. Doing so will cause the
inverter shut off or damage the capacitor or surge suppressor. If any of the above devices is connected, immediately remove it. When installing a molded case circuit breaker on the output side of the inverter, contact the manufacturer of the molded case circuit breaker. � Electromagnetic wave interference: The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. Install the EMC filter to minimize interference. � For details of options and peripheral devices, refer to the respective Instruction Manual. � A PM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply. � A PM motor is a motor with permanent magnets embedded inside. High voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the motor is running. Before closing the contactor at the output side, make sure that the inverter power is ON and the motor is stopped.
81
Options
Option List
By fitting the following options to the inverter, the inverter is provided with more functions.
Name
Type
Applications
Applicable Inverter
E800 E800-E E800-SCE
Remarks
Vector control (speed/ torque/position control) FR-A8AP E kit Encoder feedback control
Vector control can be performed for encoder-equipped
motors (induction motors). The motor speed is sent back and the speed is maintained
constant.
16-bit digital input
This input interface sets the high frequency accuracy of the
inverter using an external BCD or binary digital signal.
FR-A8AX E kit
� BCD code 3 digits (maximum 999) � BCD code 4 digits (maximum 9999)
� Binary 12 bits (maximum FFFH)
� Binary 16 bits (maximum FFFFH)
Plug-in Type
This option provides the inverter with open collector
Digital output Extension analog output
FR-A8AY E kit
outputs selected from among the standard output signals.
This option adds 2 different signals that can be monitored
such as the output frequency and output voltage.
20mADC or 10VDC meter can be connected.
Relay output
FR-A8AR E kit
Output any three output signals available with the inverter as standard from the relay contact terminals.
CC-Link communication FR-A8NC E kit
DeviceNet communication FR-A8ND E kit
This option allows the inverter to be operated or monitored or the parameter setting to be changed from a computer or
PROFIBUS-DP communication
FR-A8NP E kit
programmable controller.
LCD operation panel
FR-LU08 (-01)
Graphical operation panel with liquid crystal display
-
-
Parameter unit
FR-PU07
Interactive parameter unit with LCD display
-
-
Parameter unit with battery pack
FR-PU07BB
(-L)
This parameter unit enables parameter setting without connecting the inverter to power supply.
-
-
Enclosure surface operation panel
FR-PA07
This operation panel enables inverter operation and monitoring of frequency, etc. from the enclosure surface
-
-
Parameter unit connection cable
FR-CB20[]
Cable for connection of operation panel or parameter unit [] indicates a cable length. (1m, 3m, 5m)
-
-
Encoder cable
Connection cable for the inverter and encoder for
8
Mitsubishi Electric vector control dedicated motor
FR-V7CBL[]
Mitsubishi Electric vector control dedicated motor (SFV5RU).
(SFV5RU)
[] indicates a cable length. (5m, 15m, 30m)
USB cable
MR-J3USBCBL3M Cable length: 3 m
Amplifier connector Mini B connector (5-pin)
Personal computer
connector A connector
Options
Stand-alone type
Intercompatibility attachment
DIN rail attachment
FR-E7AT 01/02/03
FR-E8AT03
FR-E8AT04
FR-UDA 01 to 03
Panel through attachment
FR-E8CN 01 to 06
Totally enclosed structure specification attachment (IP40) AC reactor DC reactor
EMC Directive compliant noise filter
EMC compliant EMC filter installation attachment
Radio noise filter
Line noise filter
FR-E8CV 01 to 04
FR-HAL
FR-HEL
SF, FR-E5NF, FR-S5NFSA
FR-A5AT03, FR-AAT02, FR-E5T(-02)
FR-BIF(H)
FR-BSF01, FR-BLF
Filterpack
FR-BFP2
For installation of a FR-E800 series inverter to the installation holes of FR-A024/A044 series inverter.
For installation of a FR-E700/E800 inverter to the installation holes of FR-A024/A044/E700 inverter.
Attachment for installation on DIN rail
Using this attachment dissipates the inverter's heat by
having the inverter heat sink protrude from the back side of
the enclosure.
Installing the attachment to the inverter changes the
protective structure of the inverter to the totally enclosed
structure (IP40 equivalent as specified by JEM 1030).
For harmonic current reduction and inverter input power
factor improvement
EMC Directive (EN 61800-3 C3) compliant noise filter
3.7K or lower. FR-E820-3.7K FR-E820S-2.2K 3.7K or lower.
For installation of the inverter to the EMC Directive compliant EMC filter (SF).
For radio noise reduction (connect to the input side)
For line noise reduction
Combination of power factor improving DC reactor, common mode choke, and capacitive filter
0.4K to 15K of the three-phase power
input model.
: Supported : To be supported soon -: Not supported
82
Stand-alone type
Name
Type
Applications
Applicable Inverter
E800 E800-E E800-SCE
Remarks
Brake resistor
MRS
type,
MYS
type
For increasing the regenerative (permissible duty 3%ED)
braking
capability
High-duty brake resistor FR-ABR
For increasing the regenerative braking capability (permissible duty 10%/6%ED)
For increasing the braking capability of the inverter (for
Brake unit, Resistor unit, FR-BU2, FR-BR,
Discharging resistor
GZG, GRZG type
high-inertia load or negative load) Brake unit, electrical-discharge resistor and resistor unit
are used in combination
0.4K or higher.
Multifunction regeneration converter Dedicated stand-alone reactor Dedicated box-type reactor
FR-XC, FR-XCL/FR-XCG, FR-XCB
One inverter can handle harmonic suppression and power regeneration. Functions that match the application can be selected by combining the inverter/converter with the dedicated reactor FR-XCB (box-type) or FR-XCL/FR-XCG.
High power factor converter
FR-HC2
The high power factor converter switches the converter
section on/off to reshape an input current waveform into a sine wave, greatly suppressing harmonics. (Used in
-
combination with the standard accessory.)
Surge voltage suppression FR-ASF
filter
FR-BMF
Filter for suppressing surge voltage on motor
400V
400V: 5.5K or higher
Pilot generator
QVAH-10
For tracking operation. 70 V / 35 VAC 500 Hz (at 2500 r/ min)
Deviation sensor
YVGC-500WNS
For continuous speed control operation (mechanical deviation detection) Output 90VAC /90�
Analog frequency meter (64mm � 60mm)
YM-206NRI 1mA
Dedicated frequency meter (graduated to 130 Hz). Moving-coil type DC ammeter
-
-
Calibration resistor
RV24YN 10k
For frequency meter calibration. Carbon film type B characteristic
FR Configurator2 (Inverter setup software)
SW1DND-FRC2
Supports an inverter startup to maintenance.
FR Configurator Mobile (Mobile App for Inverters)
-
The app enables operation of inverters using smart phones or tablets.
-
: Supported : To be supported soon -: Not supported
8
Others
Options
83
Stand-alone option
Name (model) LCD operation panel
FR-LU08(-01)
Specification and structure
The LCD operation panel is capable of displaying text and menus. � Features
Replacement with the operation panel (FR-DU08) and installation on the enclosure surface using a connection cable (FRCB2) are possible. (To connect the FR-LU08, an optional operation panel connection connector (FR-ADP) is required.) Parameter settings of one inverter can be stored. When the FR-LU08 is connected to the inverter, the internal clock of the inverter can be synchronized with the clock of FRLU08. (Real time clock function) With a battery (CR1216), the FR-LU08 time count continues even if the main power of the inverter is turned OFF. (The time count of the inverter internal clock does not continue when the inverter power is turned OFF.) The FR-LU08-01 meets the IP55 rating (except for the PU connector). � Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
<Outline drawing>
3
<Panel cutting dimension drawing>
3.2 max.
Panel 21
FR-LU08
120 or more
27.8
Operation panel connection cable (FR-CB2[ ]) (option)
72.5 20
5
78.5
72.5
Operation panel connection connector
FR-ADP
3
66
72
2-M3 screw
22 66
Airbleeding hole
Operation panel connection connector (FR-ADP) (option)
3
3
16
Denotes the combined length of the two connectors when the
17
operation panel connection cable (FR-CB2[]) is connected to the operation panel connection connector (FR-ADP). The combined
length of the two connectors will be different if other (3rd party)
operation panel connection cables are used.
Interactive parameter unit with LCD display. � Features
Setting functionality such as direct input method with a numeric keypad, operation status indication, and help function are usable. Eight languages can be displayed. Parameter settings of one inverter can be stored. � Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
8
Parameter unit FR-PU07
<Outline drawing> 83
(14.2)
25.05 (11.45)
<Panel cutting drawing>
40
40
2.5
Options
*1 *1 *1
*1
50
51
Mounting hole
4-R1
135
57.8
67 56.8
4- 4 hole
26.5
26.5 (Valid screw depth 5.0)
M3 screw *2
When installing the FR-PU07 on the enclosure, etc., remove screws for fixing the
FR-PU07 to the inverter or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with M3 nuts.
Select the installation screws of which length will not exceed the effective depth of
80.3
the installation screws threads.
84
Name (model) Parameter unit with
battery pack FR-PU07BB(-L)
Specification and structure
This parameter unit enables parameter setting without connecting the inverter to power supply. Uses 4 � AA batteries. Can also be powered by an external 100 VAC power supply.
� Specifications
Item
Description
� When driven by batteries
AA batteries four (nickel hydride(NiMH)/alkali)
Power supply
� When driven by external power supply (100 VAC) AC adaptor
� When power is applied to the inverter
Power is supplied from the PU connector of the inverter.
Battery life
Battery life Battery exhaustion warning lamp color
changing start time From green to orange (at lowering of battery power)
Alkaline battery Approx. 260 min
Nickel metal hydride battery Approx. 340 min
Approx. 50 min before Approx. 10 min before
Switch connector
Display functions Provided appliances
Battery ON/OFF switch Modular connector for inverter connection and connector for AC adaptor connection
Alarm LED for battery exhaustion, Other display is the same as the FR-PU07.
AA alkali battery (for operation check) four
Connection cable (FR-CB203)
one
Use an AC adapter with the following specifications.
Output specifications
Rated voltage Rated current
Polarity Plug
5.0 VDC�5% or less 2 A or more Plus polarity in the center. JEITA RC-5320A compliant
The battery life is a reference value. It differs depending on the battery and the usage. Batteries are not included in FR-PU07BB-L.
� Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
<Outline drawing>
83 18
8.2
46.7
6
8
135
Options
44.7
46.7
This operation panel can be mounted to an enclosure surface to enable inverter operation and monitoring of frequency, etc. (This product does not have the parameter copy function.)
� Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
68
22
22
Enclosure surface operation panel FR-PA07
59 2-M3 screw
Parameter unit connection cable
FR-CB20[]
This cable is for connection of operation panel or parameter unit � Specifications
Model FR-CB201 FR-CB203 FR-CB205
Length 1m 3m 5m
85
Name (model)
Specification and structure USB cable for communication with the inverter using the USB port of the PC.
FR Configurator2
Mini-B connector
USB cable MR-J3USBCBL3M
Computer
USB cable
� For dedicated motors
Inverter
Inverter side
Encoder side connector
F-DPEVSB 12P 0.2 mm Earth (Ground) wire
D/MS3057-12A D/MS3106B20-29S
60 mm L
11 mm
� A shield earthing (grounding) P-clip is included.
Encoder cable FR-V7CBL[]
Inverter (When the FR-A8AP is used)
PA1 PA2 PB1 PB2 PZ1 PZ2
Encoder
A B C D F G
PG
S
SD
R
2 mm2
Positioning guide (key groove)
MA B
L
N
C P
T
D
KS R
E
J
F
HG
D/MS3106B20-29S (As viewed from wiring side)
Model
Length L (m)
FR-V7CBL5 5
FR-V7CBL15 15
FR-V7CBL30 30
8
� For cables of 30 m or longer, contact your sales representative. � Cable fabrication specifications
� When option connection cables are not available, fabricate cables according to the following table.
Use parallel connection or a large-gauge cable for wiring between terminals PG and SD and the motor end encoder. (For cables
for other terminals, use cables 0.2 mm2. )
Options
8JSJOH EJTUBODF
5 m or lower 10 m or lower 15 m or lower 20 m or lower 30 m or lower 50 m or lower 100 m or lower
0QUJPOT EFEJDBUFEFODPEFS DBCMF FR-V7CBL5 FR-V7CBL15
FR-V7CBL30
Cables on order Consult us separately.
$BCMFHBVHFGPSUFSNJOBMT1(BOE4%
'PSXJSJOHVTJOHDBCMFT NN
2 or more cables in parallel 2 or more cables in parallel
'PSXJSJOHVTJOHBDBCMF XJUI MBSHFSHBVHF
0.4 mm2 or more
4 or more cables in parallel 4 or more cables in parallel
0.75 mm2 or more
6 or more cables in parallel
6 or more cables in parallel
1.25 mm2 or more
86
Name (model)
Specification and structure
Intercompatibility attachment
This attachment is used to install the FR-E800 series inverter using the installation holes of the FR-A024/FRA044/FR-E700 series inverter. (The depth increases after installation of the inverter when the attachment is used.)
� Replacing the FR-A024/FR-A044 inverter with the FR-E820/FR-E840 inverter
Compatible Former Model
Mountable Model
Intercompatibility Attachment
0.1K to 0.75K
0008 (0.1K) to 0050 (0.75K)
FR-E7AT01
FR-A024 1.5K
FR-E820
0080 (1.5K)
FR-E7AT02
2.2K, 3.7K
0110 (2.2K), 0175 (3.7K)
FR-E7AT03
FR-A044
0.4K, 0.75K 1.5K to 3.7K
FR-E840
0016 (0.4K), 0026 (0.75K)
0040 (1.5K) to 0095 (3.7K)
FR-E7AT02 FR-E7AT03
� Replacing the FR-E740 inverter with the FR-E840 inverter
Compatible Former Model
FR-E740
0.4K to 1.5K 2.2K, 3.7K
Mountable Model
FR-E840
0016 (0.4K) to 0040 (1.5K)
0060 (2.2K), 0095 (3.7K)
Intercompatibility Attachment FR-E7AT02
: The attachment is not required. To replace the FR-E720 inverter with the FR-E820 inverter, use the FR-E8AT03
� Outline dimension (Unit: mm) � FR-E7AT01
2 I5 hole
� FR-E7AT02
2 I5 hole
5.5
5.5
Intercompatibility attachment
FR-E7AT01/02/03
8
149
138
149
138
Options
5
5.5
128
5.5
12
5.5
5
12
139
5.5
93
104
� FR-E7AT03
2 I5 hole
5.5
149
138
5
5.5
188
5.5
12
199
87
Name (model) Intercompatibility
attachment FR-E8AT03, 04
Specification and structure
Intercompatibility attachment This attachment is used to install the FR-E800 series inverter using the installation holes of the FR-E700 series inverter.
(The depth increases after installation of the inverter when the attachment is used.)
� Replacing the FR-E720 inverter with the FR-E820 inverter
Compatible former model
Mountable model
Intercompatibility attachment
FR-E720
0.1K to 2.2K 3.7K
FR-E820
0.1K (0008) to 2.2K (0110) 3.7K (0175)
-- FR-E8AT03
FR-E720S
0.1K to 1.5K 2.2K
FR-E820S
0.1K (0008) to 1.5K (0080) 2.2K (0110)
-- FR-E8AT04
--: The attachment is not required. To replace the FR-E740 inverter with the FR-E840 inverter, use the FR-E7AT02.
� Outline dimension (Unit: mm) FR-E8AT03
FR-E8AT04
2 I5 hole
5.5
12 2 � I4.5 hole
8
151
138
118
129
118
5
5.5
158
169
5.5
5
6
128
12
140
Use of attachment enables the inverter to be installed on DIN rail. � Selection table
Attachment Model
E820
Inverter Capacity
E820S
FR-UDA01
0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K, 0.75K
0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K
8
FR-UDA02 FR-UDA03
1.5K, 2.2K 3.7K
0.75K, 1.5K 2.2K
� Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
Options
DIN rail installation attachment
FR-UDA01 to 03
FR-UDA01 68 67
FR-UDA02 108 67
15
15 10
FR-UDA03 170 67
1.6 13.9
128
128
128
8.7
8.7
8.7
Panel Through Attachment
FR-E8CN01 to 06
Hook
Hook 3�M4�0.7 screw
4�M4�0.7 screw
Hook 8�M4�0.7 screw
Using this attachment dissipates about 70% of the inverter's heat by having the inverter heat sink protrude from the back side of the
enclosure. � Selection table
Attachment Model
FR-E8CN01 FR-E8CN02 FR-E8CN03 FR-E8CN04 FR-E8CN05 FR-E8CN06
E820 1.5K, 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K, 7.5K -- -- --
Inverter Capacity
E840
E860
E820S
--
--
1.5K
--
--
2.2K
--
--
--
1.5K
--
--
2.2K, 3.7K 1.5K, 2.2K --
5.5K, 7.5K 3.7K to 7.5K --
Attachment
Panel
Inside
Outside
Attachment
Panel
88
Name (model)
Specification and structure
Improves the power factor and reduces the harmonic current at the input side. Connect an AC reactor at the input side of the inverter. � Selection method
Select an AC reactor according to the applied motor capacity. (Select the AC reactor according to the motor capacity even if the capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity.) � Connection diagram
<Three-phase power supply> FR-HAL
Inverter
<Single-phase power supply> FR-HAL
Inverter
R
Three-phase AC
S
power supply
T
X R/L1 U
Y S/L2 V
R
Motor
Single-phase AC
power supply
S
M
Z
T
T/L3 W
X R/L1 U
Y S/L2 V
Z W
Motor M
200V 400V
AC reactor (for power supply
coordination) FR-HAL
� Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
Model
W W1 H
D
D1
d
Mass (kg)
0.4K 104 84 99 72 40 M5 0.6
0.75K 104 84 99 74 44 M5 0.8
1.5K 104 84 99 77 50 M5 1.1
2.2K 115 40 115 77 57 M6 1.5
3.7K 115 40 115 83 67 M6 2.2
5.5K 115 40 115 83 67 M6 2.3
7.5K 130 50 135 100 86 M6 4.2
11K 160 75 164 111 92 M6 5.2
15K 160 75 167 126 107 M6 7.0
18.5K 160 75 128 175 107 M6 7.1
22K 185 75 150 158 87 M6 9.0
30K 185 75 150 168 87 M6 9.7
Model
W W1 H
D
D1
d
Mass (kg)
H0.4K 135 120 115 64 45 M4 1.5
H0.75K 135 120 115 64 45 M4 1.5
H1.5K 135 120 115 64 45 M4 1.5
H2.2K 135 120 115 64 45 M4 1.5
H3.7K 135 120 115 74 57 M4 2.5
H5.5K 160 145 142 76 55 M4 3.5
H7.5K 160 145 142 96 75 M4 5.0
H11K 160 145 146 96 75 M4 6.0
H15K 220 200 195 105 70 M5 9.0
H18.5K 220 200 215 170 70 M5 9.0
H22K 220 200 215 170 70 M5 9.5
H30K 220 200 215 170 75 M5 11
(a) Approximately 88% of the power factor improving effect can be obtained (92.3% when calculated with 1 power factor for the fundamental wave according to the Architectural Standard
Less than D
Specifications (Electrical Installation) supervised by the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport
and Tourism of Japan).
H
(b) This is a sample outline dimension drawing. The shape differs by the model.
W1 and D1 indicate distances between installation holes. The installation hole size is indicated by
d.
(c) When installing an AC reactor (FR-HAL), install in the orientation shown below.
(H)55K or lower: Horizontal installation or vertical installation (H)75K or higher: Horizontal installation (d) Keep enough clearance around the reactor because it heats up.
D1
W1
W
8
(Keep a clearance of minimum 10cm each on top and bottom and minimum 5cm each on right and
left regardless of the installation orientation.)
Options
89
Name (model)
Specification and structure
Improves the power factor and reduces the harmonic current at the input side.
Selection method Select a DC reactor according to the applied motor capacity. (Select it according to the motor capacity even if the capacity
is smaller than the inverter capacity.) (Refer to QBHF) � Connection diagram
Connect a DC reactor to the inverter terminals P1
and P. Remove the jumper across terminals P1 and P. If the jumper is left attached, no power
Remove a jumper across terminals P1-P.
factor improvement can be obtained.
The connection cable between the reactor and
the inverter should be as short as possible (5m or
less).
Three-phase AC power supply
R/L1 S/L2
T/L3
� Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
FR-HEL
P1
P
The connection cable should be 5m maximum.
P1
P/+ N/-
U V W
Inverter
Motor M
Less than D
Less than D
DC reactor (for power supply
coordination) FR-HEL-(H)[]K
H
W1 W FR-HEL-0.4K to 2.2K FR-HEL-H0.4K
HW
W1
D1
FR-HEL-3.7K to 30K
FR-HEL-H0.75K to H30K
Model
W W1 H
D
D1
d
Mass (kg)
0.4K 70 60 71 61 M4 0.4
Model
W W1 H
D
D1
d
Mass (kg)
H0.4K 90 75 78 60 M5 0.6
H0.75K 66 50 100 70 48 M4 0.8
0.75K 85 74 81 61 M4 0.5
H1.5K 66 50 100 80 54 M4 1
200V 400V
1.5K 85 74 81 70 M4 0.8 2.2K 85 74 81 70 M4 0.9 3.7K 77 55 92 82 57 M4 1.5 5.5K 77 55 92 92 67 M4 1.9 7.5K 86 60 113 98 72 M4 2.5
H2.2K 76 50 H3.7K 86 55 H5.5K 96 60 H7.5K 96 60 H11K 105 75
110 80 54 120 95 69 128 100 75 128 105 80 137 110 85
M4 1.3 M4 2.3 M5 3 M5 3.5 M5 4.5
11K 105 64 133 112 79 M6 3.3
H15K 105 75 152 125 95 M5 5
8
15K 105 64 18.5K 105 64 22K 105 64 30K 114 72
133 115 84 M6 4.1 93 165 94 M6 4.7 93 175 104 M6 5.6 100 200 101 M6 7.8
H18.5K 114 75 H22K 133 90 H30K 133 90
162 120 80 178 120 75 178 120 80
M5 5 M5 6 M5 6.5
Options
(a) The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). (Refer to
QBHF) (b) Approximately 93% of the power factor improving effect can be obtained (94.4% when calculated with 1 power factor for the
fundamental wave according to the Architectural Standard Specifications (Electrical Installation) supervised by the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism of Japan). (c) This is a sample outline dimension drawing. The shape differs by the model. W1 and D1 indicate distances between installation holes. The installation hole size is indicated by d. (d) When installing a DC reactor (FR-HEL), install in the orientation shown below. (H)55K or lower: Horizontal installation or vertical installation (H)75K or higher: Horizontal installation (e) Keep enough clearance around the reactor because it heats up. (Keep a clearance of minimum 10cm each on top and bottom and minimum 5cm each on right and left regardless of the installation orientation.)
90
Name (model)
Specification and structure
� The EMC compliant EMC filter (EN 61800-3 2nd Environment Category C3) is a filter compliant with the EU EMC Directive (EN61800-3 2nd Environment Category C3).
H H
W
D
EMC filter Model
Applicable inverter model
Intercompatibility attachment
Outline dimension
(Unit: mm)
W
H
D
Mass Leakage current (mA) Loss
(kg)
(reference value)
(W)
SF1306 FR-E820-0.1K to 1.5K -
110 200 36.5 0.7
10
7.3
FR-E5T
FR-E820-2.2K or
SF1309
FR-E820-3.7K
FR-E7AT03 FR-E8AT03+FR-E5T
200
282
57
2.1
15
15
FR-E820S-2.2K
or FR-E7AT03
SF1320
FR-E820S-0.1K to 0.4K
-
70 168 30.5 0.4
10
2.7
SF1321
FR-E820S-0.75K -
110 168 36.5 0.6
10
3.8
FR-E5NFH0.75K
FR-E840-0.4K, 0.75K -
140 210 46 1.1
22.6
5.5
FR-E5NFH3.7K
FR-E840-1.5K to 3.7K -
140 210 46 1.2
44.5
8
EMC Directive compliant EMC filter
SF, FR-E5NF, FR-S5NFSA EMC compliant EMC
filter installation attachment FR-A5AT03, FR-AAT02,
FR-E5T(-02)
FR-E5NFH7.5K
FR-S5NFSA1.5K
FR-E840-5.5K, 7.5K FR-E820S-1.5K -
220 210 47 2
68.4
110 168 35 0.7
9.5
15
8.55
8
Options
W
D
D1
EMC filter Model
Applicable inverter model
Intercompatibility attachment
Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
W H D D1
Mass Leakage current (mA) Loss
(kg)
(reference value)
(W)
SF1260
FR-E820-5.5K, 7.5K FR-E5T-02
FR-E820-11K
FR-A5AT03
222 468 80 39 5
440
118
SF1261
FR-E820-15K
FR-AAT02
253 600 86 38 9.3 71
37
SF1262 FR-E820-18.5K, 22K
303 650 86 47 11
71
78
SF1175
FR-E840-11K, 15K FR-AAT02
253 530 60 35 4.7 76
56
SF1176 FR-E840-18.5K, 22K
303 600 60 38 5.9 108
71
Depth is 12mm deeper when an intercompatibility attachment is installed. Leakage current for one phase of three-phase three-wire star-connection power supply. Leakage current for all phases of three-phase
three-wire delta-connection power supply is three times greater than the indicated value.
The noise filter cannot be installed to the back of the inverter. Install it to the side of the inverter. This is a sample outline dimension drawing. The shape differs by the model.
� Countermeasures for leakage current
Take the following actions to prevent malfunction of peripheral devices or an electric shock caused by leakage current.
(a) Earth (ground) the EMC filter before connecting the power supply. When doing so, confirm that earthing (grounding) is securely performed through the earthing (grounding) part of the enclosure.
(b) Select an appropriate earth leakage circuit breaker or an earth leakage relay by considering leakage current of the EMC filter. Note that earth leakage circuit breaker may not be used in some cases such as when leakage current of the EMC filter is too large. In that case, use an earth leakage relay with high sensitivity. When both of earth leakage circuit breaker and earth leakage relay cannot be used, securely earth (ground) as explained in (a).
91
Name (model) 3BEJPOPJTFGJMUFS
'3#*' )
Line noise filter FR-BSF01, FR-BLF
Specification and structure
� Outline dimension
300 41 4
RST
Red White Blue Green
29 58
<Three-phase power supply>
<Single-phase power supply>
Leakage currents: 4mA
MCCB
Power
supply
4.3 hole
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Power supply
MCCB
Insulate
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2
Earth (Ground)
Earth (Ground)
29 7
Radio noise filter FR-BIF(-H)
Radio noise filter FR-BIF(-H)
44
(Unit: mm)
(a) Cannot be connected to the inverter output side. (b) The wire should be cut as short as possible, and connected to the inverter terminal block. (c) To use the radio noise filter (FR-BIF) for the single-phase input model, ensure the insulation of the T-phase before connecting
the filter to the input side of the inverter.
Install an EMC filter (ferrite core) to reduce the electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter. Effective in the range from about
0.5 MHz to 5 MHz. � Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
FR-BSF01
FR-BLF
31.5
110
95
2 5
7
7
14
130
85
22.5
35
3 80
65 33
160 180
1.5
4.5 65
(a) Wind each phase for three times (4T) in the same direction. (The greater the number of turns, the more effective result is obtained.)
MCCB
Inverter
When using several line noise filters to make 4T or more, wind the phases (cables) Power
R/L1
8
together. Do not use a different line noise filter for different phases.
supply
(b) When the cables are too thick to be winded, run each cable (phase) through four or
more filters installed in series in one direction.
Line noise filter
S/L2 T/L3
(c) The filter can be used in the same way as the output side. When using filters at the
output side, do not wind the cable more than 3 times (4T) for each filter because the filter may overheat.
(d) A thick cable of 38 mm2 or more is not applicable to the FR-BSF01. Use FR-BLF for a larger diameter cable.
(e) Do not wind the earthing (grounding) cable.
Options
92
Name (model) Filterpack FR-BFP2
Specification and structure
� Using the option, the inverter may conform to the Japanese guideline for reduction of harmonic emission. � The option is available for three-phase 200V/400V class inverters with 0.4K to 15K capacity.
� Specification
� Three-phase 200V pow input model
Model FR-BFP2-[]K
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
Permissible inverter output current (A)
2.5
4.2
7
10
16.5
23.8
31.8
45
Approximate mass (kg)
1.3
1.4
2.0
2.2
2.8
3.8
4.5
6.7
Power factor improving reactor
Install a DC reactor on the DC side. 93% to 95% of power supply power factor under 100% load (94.4% )
Noise filter
Common mode choke
Install a ferrite core on the input side.
Capacitive filter About 4mA of capacitor leakage current
Protective structure (JEM 1030) Open type (IP00)
15 58 7.0
� Three-phase 400V power input mode
Model FR-BFP2-H[]K
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
Permissible inverter output current (A)
1.2
2.2
3.7
5
8.1
12
16.3
23
Approximate mass (kg)
1.6
1.7
1.9
2.3
2.6
4.5
5.0
7.0
Power factor improving reactor
Install a DC reactor on the DC side. 93% to 95% of power supply power factor under 100% load (94.4% )
Noise filter
Common mode choke
Install a ferrite core on the input side.
Capacitive filter About 8mA of capacitor leakage current
Protective structure (JEM 1030) Open type (IP00)
15 29.5 8.2
Select a capacity for the load (inverter output) current to be equal to or less than the permissible inverter output current. The indicated leakage current is for one phase of the three-phase three-wire star-connection power supply. The values in parentheses are calculated by applying 1 power factor to the reference waveform in accordance with the Architectural
Standard Specifications (Electrical Installation) supervised by the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism of Japan.)
� Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
<FR-BFP2-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K> <FR-BFP2-H0.4K, H0.75K, H1.5K, H2.2K, H3.7K>
2 4.5 hole
2 4.5 hole
<FR-BFP2-5.5K, 7.5K, 11K, 15K> <FR-BFP2-H5.5K, H7.5K, H11K, H15K>
2 C hole
2 C hole
H2
H2
5
5
8
H1
H
H1
Options
H1
Rating plate
5
4.5
D2
D1
D2
D
H
5
H1
4.5 W2 W1 W2
W
Rating plate
H2
H2
C1
12.5
D1 12.5
25
D
(25)
L-bracket for inverter
back installation (Enclosed with the option)
145 195 220
C1 25
Capacity
W W1 W2 H H1 D
0.4K, 0.75K 68 30 19 218 208 60
1.5K, 2.2K 108 55 26.5 188 178 80
3.7K
170 120 25 188 178 65
H0.4K, H0.75K 108 55 26.5 188 178 55
H1.5K, H2.2K, H3.7K
108 55 26.5 188 178 80
The 400V class H0.4K and H0.75K have no slit.
D1 D2 30 15 55 12.5 40 12.5 30 12.5
55 12.5
400V 200V
Capacity
H H1 H2 D D1 C C1 C2
5.5K, 7.5K 210 198 6 75 50 4.5 4.5 5.3
11K
320 305 7.5 85 60 6 6 5.3
15K
320 305 7.5 85 60 6 6 6.4
H5.5K, H7.5K 210 198 6 75 50 4.5 4.5 4.3
H11K
320 305 7.5 85 60 6 6 4.3
H15K
320 305 7.5 85 60 6 6 6.4
L-bracket is not attached when shipped from the factory but is enclosed with the option. L-bracket is required to install the option to the back of inverter.
(a) A Filterpack can be installed on the side or rear panel of the inverter. (Rear panel installation is not available for FR-E820-5.5K and 7.5K, and FR-E840-2.2K and 3.7K.)
(b) Above outline dimension drawings are examples. Dimensions differ by model.
400V 200V
93
Name (model)
� Outline dimension
� MRS type 500
Round crimp terminals 1.25-4
182 172
4.3 hole
1.2
Specification and structure
20
4.3
(Unit : mm)
42
� MYS type 500
Round crimp terminals 1.25-4
230 220
(Unit : mm)
3.5 4.3
20 60
Brake resistor MRS type, MYS type
Resistor Model
Control torque / permissible duty
2 0
MRS type
0
V
MYS type
MRS120W200 MRS120W100 150% torque 3%ED
MRS120W60 MRS120W40 MYS220W50
100% torque 3%ED 150% torque 3%ED 100% torque 3%ED 150% torque 3%ED 100% torque 6%ED
Two unit in parallel
Resistance Value ()
200 100
60
40
Permissible Power (W)
15 30
55
80
Applicable Motor Capacity
(kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 2.2 3.7
50/2
2�80
3.7
(a) The temperature of the brake resistor becomes 200�C or more depending on the operation frequency, care must be taken for installation and heat dissipation.
(b) The brake resistor cannot be used with the 0.1K and 0.2K. (c) Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
8
Options
94
Name (model)
Specification and structure
Connecting the option improves the regenerative braking capability of the inverter. � Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
Brake Resistor Model
Permissible Brake Duty
Outline Dimension W W1 D H
FR-ABR-0.4K 10%
140 500 40 21
FR-ABR-0.75K 10%
215 500 40 21
2 0
FR-ABR-2.2K
10% 10%
FR-ABR-3.7K 10%
0 FR-ABR-5.5K 10% V FR-ABR-7.5K 10%
240 500 50 26
215 500 61 33 335 500 61 33 400 500 80 40
FR-ABR-11K 6%
400 700 100 50
FR-ABR-15K 6%
300 700 100 50
FR-ABR-22K 6%
400 700 100 50
Resistance Approx.
Value
Mass
()
(kg)
200
0.2
100
0.4
60
0.5
40 25 20 13 18(�1/2) 13(�1/2)
0.8 1.3 2.2 3.5 2.4(�2) 3.3(�2)
High-duty brake resistor
FR-ABR
Brake Resistor Model
Permissible Brake Duty
Outline Dimension W W1 D H
FR-ABR-H0.4K 10%
115 500 40 21
FR-ABR-H0.75K 10%
140 500 40 21
FR-ABR-H1.5K 10%
215 500 40 21
4 0
FR-ABR-H2.2K FR-ABR-H3.7K
10% 10%
0 V
FR-ABR-H5.5K FR-ABR-H7.5K
10% 10%
240 500 50 26 215 500 61 33 335 500 61 33 400 500 80 40
FR-ABR-H11K 6%
400 700 100 50
FR-ABR-H15K 6%
300 700 100 50
FR-ABR-H22K 6%
450 700 100 50
Resistance Approx.
Value
Mass
()
(kg)
1200
0.2
700
0.2
350
0.4
250
0.5
150
0.8
110
1.3
75
2.2
52
3.2
18(�2)
2.4(�2)
52(�1/2) 3.3(�2)
W1+20 0
D H
W
For the 1.5K and 2.2K inverter.
For the 15K brake resistor, configure so that two 18resistors are connected in parallel.
For the 18.5K and 22K inverter.
For the 22K brake resistor, configure so that two 13 resistors are connected in parallel.
For the H15K brake resistor, configure so that two 18 resistors are connected in series. FR-ABR-15K is indicated on the resistor.
(same resistor as the 200V class 15K) For the H18.5K and H22K inverter.
8
For the H22K brake resistor, configure so that two 52 resistors are connected in parallel.
Options
(a) The regenerative brake duty setting should be less than permissible brake duty in the table above. (b) The temperature of the brake resistor becomes 300C or more depending on the operation frequency, care must be taken
for installation and heat dissipation.
(c) MYS type resistor can be also used. Note that the permissible brake duty. (d) The brake resistor cannot be used with the 0.1K and 0.2K. (e) Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
95
Name (model)
Specification and structure
Provides a braking capability greater than that is provided by an external brake resistor. This option can also be connected to the inverters without built-in brake transistors. Three types of discharging resistors are available. Make a selection according to the required braking torque. � Specification
[Brake unit]
Model: FR-BU2-[]
Applicable motor capacity Connected brake resistor Multiple (parallel) driving
Approximate mass (kg)
200V
400V
1.5K
3.7K
7.5K
15K
30K
H7.5K
H15K
H30K
The applicable capacity differs by the braking torque and the operation rate (%ED).
GRZG type, FR-BR, MT-BR5 (For the combination, refer to the table below.)
Max. 10 units (However, the torque is limited by the permissible current of the connected inverter.)
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.4
0.9
0.9
1.4
[Discharging resistor]
Model: GRZG type
GZG300W50 (1 unit)
200V
400V
GRZG200- GRZG300-5 GRZG400-2 GRZG200- GRZG300-5 GRZG400-2
10 (3 units) (4 units)
(6 units) 10 (3 units) (4 units)
(6 units)
Number of connectable units
1 unit
3 in series (1 set)
4 in series (1 set)
6 in series (1 set)
6 in series (2 sets)
8 in series (2 sets)
12 in series (2 sets)
Discharging
resistor combined 50
30
20
12
60
40
24
resistance ()
Continuous
operation permissible power
100
300
600
1200
600
1200
2400
(W)
[Resistor unit]
Model: FR-BR-[]
200 V
400 V
15K 30K 55K H15K
Discharging resistor combined resistance ()
8
4
2
32
Brake unit
Continuous operation permissible power (W)
990
1990 3910 990
FR-BU2 Resistor unit
Approximate mass (kg) 15 30 70 15
FR-BR Discharging resistor
The 1 set contains the number of units in the parentheses. For the 400 V class, 2 sets are required.
8
GZG type, GRZG type � Combination between the brake unit and the resistor unit
Discharging resistor model or resistor unit model
Options
Brake unit model
Model
GRZG type Number of connectable units
FR-BR
FR-BU2-1.5K
GZG 300W-50 (1 unit)
1 unit
-
FR-BU2-3.7K
GRZG 200-10 (3 units)
3 in series (1 set)
-
200V
FR-BU2-7.5K
GRZG 300-5 (4 units)
4 in series (1 set)
-
FR-BU2-15K
GRZG 400-2 (6 units)
6 in series (1 set)
FR-BR-15K
FR-BU2-30K
-
-
FR-BR-30K
FR-BU2-H7.5K
GRZG 200-10 (3 units)
6 in series (2 sets)
-
400V
FR-BU2-H15K
GRZG 300-5 (4 units)
8 in series (2 sets)
FR-BR-H15K
FR-BU2-H30K
GRZG 400-2 (6 units)
12 in series (2 sets)
FR-BR-H30K
The 1 set contains the number of units in the parentheses. For the 400 V class, 2 sets are required.
� Selection method [GRZG type] The maximum temperature rise of the discharging resistors is about 200�C. Use heat-resistant wires to perform wiring, and make sure that they will not come in contact with resistors. Do not touch the discharging resistor while the power is ON or for about 10 minutes after the power supply turns OFF.
Otherwise you may get an electric shock
Power supply voltage
200V
400V
Braking
torque
0.4 0.75
50% 30s FR-BU2-1.5K 100% 30s FR-BU2-1.5K 50% 30s - 100%% 30s -
1.5 FR-BU2-3.7K
Motor capacity (kW)
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
FR-BU2-3.7K FR-BU2-7.5K FR-BU2-H7.5K FR-BU2-H7.5K
FR-BU2-7.5K FR-BU2-15K
FR-BU2-H15K
11
15
FR-BU2-15K 2�FR-BU2-15K FR-BU2-H15K FR-BU2-H30K
Power supply voltage
200V
400V
Braking torque
Motor capacity (kW)
18.5
22
30
50% 30s 100% 30s 50% 30s 100% 30s
2�FR-BU2-15K 3�FR-BU2-15K FR-BU2-H30K 2�FR-BU2-H30K
4�FR-BU2-15K
The number next to the model name indicates the number of connectable units in parallel. The inverter for 400V class 1.5K or lower cannot be used in combination with a brake unit. To use in combination with a brake unit, use
the inverter of 2.2K or higher.
96
Name (model)
Specification and structure
[FR-BR] The maximum temperature rise of the resistor unit is about 100�C. Therefore, use heat-resistant wires (such as glass wires).
%ED at short-time rating when braking torque is 100%
Model
Motor capacity(kW) 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW
200V
FR-BU2-15K FR-BU2-30K
%ED
80 -
40 -
15 10 65 30
400V
FR-BU2-H15K FR-BU2-H30K
%ED
80 -
40 -
15 10 65 30
Braking torque (%) at 10%ED in short-time rating of 15 s
Model
Motor capacity(kW) 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW
'3#6, Braking 280 200 120 100
200V
torque
'3#6, (%)
-
-
260 180
'3#6), Braking 280 200 120 100
400V
torque
'3#6), (%)
-
-
260 180
Regeneration duty factor (operation frequency)%ED
tb tc
100
tb<15s (continuous operation time)
Example 1 Travel operation
Example 2 Lift operation
Ascending
Speed Speed
tc
� Connection diagram
Brake unit FR-BU2
Resistor unit FR-BR
Discharging resistor GZG type, GRZG type
MCCB Three-phase
AC power supply
Time t tb
Descending
t1 tc
t2 t3 t4
Time t tb=t1+t2+t3+t4
ON OFF
T *3
MC
MC Resistor unit or
MC
Inverter
discharging resistor
R/L1 U
Motor
P
S/L2 V
IM
PR
T/L3 W
Resistor unit or discharging resistor P
PR
*2 P/+ N/-
Reset Brake permission signal
Signal for master/slave
PR
A
P/+
B
N/-
C
*2
RES BUE *1 SD
MSG SD MSG SD
Brake unit FR-BU2
PR
A
P/+
B
8
N/-
C
*2
Options
RES BUE *1 SD
MSG SD MSG SD
Brake unit FR-BU2
When connecting several brake units
A jumper is connected across BUE and SD in the initial status. Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal symbols match with each other.
Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor. When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
� Outline dimension (Unit: mm) <FR-BU2L>
<GZG,GRZG>
<FR-BR>
H
H
W
D
W
D
Model
WH
D
FR-BU2-1.5K to 15K 68 128 132.5
FR-BU2-30K 108 128 129.5
FR-BU2-H7.5K, H15K 68 128 132.5
FR-BU2-H30K 108 128 129.5
Model GZG300W GRZG200 GRZG300 GRZG400
WH D 335 78 40 306 55 26 334 79 40 411 79 40
Model FR-BR-15K FR-BR-30K FR-BR-H15K FR-BR-H30K
WH D 170 450 220 340 600 220 170 450 220 340 600 220
97
Name (model)
Specification and structure
One inverter can handle harmonic suppression and power regeneration. Functions that match the application can be selected by combining the inverter/converter with the dedicated reactor FR-XCB (box-
type) or FR-XCL/FR-XCG � Combination
<<Combination matrix of FR-XCL and FR-XC(-PWM)>>
Dedicated standalone Multifunction regeneration
reactor
converter
FR-XCL-[ ] FR-XCG-[]
FR-XC-[ ]
FR-XC-[ ]-PWM
7.5K
7.5K
-
<<Combination matrix of FR-MCB and FR-XC>>
Multifunction
Dedicated contactor box
regeneration
converter
FR-MCB-H[ ]
FR-XC-[ ] (-PWM)
150
H75K
11K
11K
-
15K
15K
-
22K
22K
18.5K
30K
30K
22K
37K
37K
37K
<<Combination matrix of FR-XCCP and FR-XC(-PWM)>>
Converter installation attachment for enclosure
Multifunction regeneration
converter
55K
55K
55K
FR-XCCP[ ]
FR-XC-[ ]
H7.5K H11K
H7.5K
-
H11K
-
01
(H) 7.5K (H) 11K
H15K
H15K
-
02
(H) 15K
H22K
H22K
H18.5K
(H) 22K
H30K H37K
H30K H37K
H22K H37K
03
(H) 30K (H) 18.5K-PWM
H55K
H55K
H55K
(H) 22K-PWM
Multifunction regeneration converter
FR-XC Dedicated stand-alone
reactor FR-XCL/FR-XCG
H75K H90K
50�C rating H75K
40�C rating H75K
50�C rating H75K
40�C rating H75K
<<Combination matrix of FR-XCB and FR-XC(-PWM)>>
Dedicated box-type Multifunction regeneration
reactor
converter
FR-XCB-[ ]
FR-XC-[ ] FR-XC-[ ]-PWM
<<Combination matrix of FR-XCCU and FR-XC(-PWM)>>
IP20 compatible attachment
Multifunction regeneration
converter
FR-XCCU[ ]
FR-XC-[ ] (-PWM)
01
37K H55K
02
55K
Dedicated box-type
18.5K
22K
22K
30K
18.5K 22K
03
H37K
reactor FR-XCB
8
37K 55K H18.5K H22K
37K 55K H22K H30K
37K 55K H18.5K H22K
The harmonic suppression function is pre-enabled in this model. To use the converter with the FR-XCL, change the "9999" setting of Pr.416 Control method selection to "0" (harmonic suppression disabled).
The harmonic suppression function is not pre-enabled in this
H37K
H37K
H37K
model. To use the converter with the FR-XCB, change the "9999" setting of Pr.416 Control method selection to "1"
H55K
H55K
H55K
(harmonic suppression enabled).
H75K
H75K
H75K
Options
� Specifications
<<200V class>>
Model
Harmonic
suppression
Common bus
regeneration mode
Applicable inverter
capacity (kW)
Disabled Enabled
Overload current rating
Power regeneration
mode
Potential regenerative capacity (kW)
Overload current rating
Rated input AC voltage/
frequency
Disabled Enabled
Power source
Permissible AC voltage
fluctuation
Disabled Enabled
Permissible frequency fluctuation
Disabled Enabled
Input power factor
Enabled
Approx. mass (kg)
FR-XC-[ ]K
FR-XC-[ ]K-PWM
7.5 11 15 22 30 37 55 18.5 22 37 55
7.5 11 15 22 30 37 55 22 30 37 55
-
-
-
18.5 22 37 55 18.5 22 37 55
100% continuous /150% 60 s
100% continuous /150% 60 s
5.5 7.5 11 18.5 22 30 45 18.5 22 30 45
100% continuous /150% 60 s
100% continuous /150% 60 s
Three-phase 200 to 240 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Three-phase 200 to 240 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
-
-
-
Three-phase 200 to 230 V Three-phase 200 to 230 V
50 Hz/60 Hz
50 Hz/60 Hz
Three-phase 70 to 264 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Three-phase 170 to 264 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
-
-
-
Three-phase 170 to 253 V Three-phase 170 to 253 V
50 Hz/60 Hz
50 Hz/60 Hz
�5%
�5%
-
-
-
�5%
�5%
-
-
-
0.99 or more (when load 0.99 or more (when load
ratio is 100%)
ratio is 100%)
5
5
6
10.5 10.5 28 38 10.5 10.5 28 38
98
Name (model)
Specification and structure
<<400V class>>
Model
FR-XC-H[ ]K
FR-XC-H[ ]K-PWM
Harmonic suppression
7.5
11
15
22
30
37
55
75 18.5
22
37
55
75
Common bus
regeneration
Applicable inverter
capacity (kW)
Disabled 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 55 75 22 30 37 55 75 Enabled - - - 18.5 22 37 55 75 18.5 22 37 55 75
mode
Overload current rating 100% continuous /150% 60 s
100% continuous /150% 60 s
Power regeneration
Potential regenerative capacity (kW)
5.5
7.5
11
18.5 22 30
45 75 18.5 22
30
45
75
mode
Overload current rating 100% continuous /150% 60 s
100% continuous /150% 60s
Rated input AC voltage/
frequency
Disabled Enabled
Three-phase 380 to 500 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
-
-
-
Three-phase 380 to 480 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Three-phase 380 to 500 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Three-phase 380 to 480 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power source
Permissible AC voltage
fluctuation
Disabled Enabled
Three-phase 323 to 550 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
-
-
-
Three-phase 323 to 506 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Three-phase 323 to 550 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Three-phase 323 to 506 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Permissible frequency fluctuation
Disabled �5% Enabled - - - �5%
�5% �5%
Input power factor
Enabled -
-
-
0.99 or more (when load ratio is 100%)
0.99 or more (when load ratio is 100%)
Approx. mass (kg)
5 5 6 10.5 10.5 28 28 45 10.5 10.5 28 28 45
Multifunction regeneration converter
FR-XC Dedicated stand-alone
reactor FR-XCL/FR-XCG
The harmonic suppression function is not pre-enabled in this model. The power regeneration mode is selectable when the harmonic suppression function is disabled. The DC bus voltage is approx. 297 VDC at an input voltage of 200 VAC, approx. 327 VDC at 220 VAC, and approx. 342 VDC at 230
VAC. The DC bus voltage is approx. 594 VDC at an input voltage of 400 VAC, approx. 653 VDC at 440 VAC, and approx. 713 VDC at 480
VAC. Mass of the FR-XC alone. 90 kW for the 40�C rating
Dedicated box-type reactor FR-XCB
� Connection diagram <<Common bus regeneration mode with harmonic suppression enabled (for the FR-XC-(H)55K or lower)>>
FR-XC
MCCB MC
Power supply
Fuse 7 Fuse 7 Fuse 7
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P4
FR-XCB
38
R2/L12 R2/L12
S2/L22 S2/L22
P/+
T2/L32 T2/L32
LOH1 LOH2
SD FAN1
34
LOH RES SOF SD PC FAN
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Open collector
N/-
SOURCE
SINK
RYA RYB RSO
SE
C B A
PU connector
6
Junction terminal Fuse
Fuse
Inverter
1
R/L1
U
S/L2
V
IMM
T/L3
W
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
2 N/-
X10(MRS)5 RES SD
Inverter
1
R/L1
U
S/L2
V
IMM
T/L3
W
Options
8
Never connect the power supply to terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 Junction terminal
on the inverter. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and
Fuse
the converter. Connect between the inverter terminal P/+ and the converter
Fuse
terminal P/+ and between the inverter terminal N/- and the
converter terminal N/- for polarity consistency. Connecting opposite
polarity of terminals P/+ and N/- will damage the converter and the
inverter.
Confirm the correct phase sequence of three-phase current to
connect between the reactor and the converter, and between the
power supply and the reactor (terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/ L3).
Incorrect connection will damage the converter.
Always connect between the power supply and terminals R/L1, S/
L2, and T/L3 of the converter. Operating the inverter without
connecting them will damage the converter. Assign the X10 signal to any of the input terminals.
Junction terminal Fuse
Do not connect anything to terminal P4.
Install the UL listed fuse on the input side of the FR-XCB reactor to
Fuse
meet the UL/cUL standards (refer to the Instruction Manual of the
converter for information about the fuse).
Do not install an MCCB or MC between the reactor and the
converter. Doing so disrupts proper operation.
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
2 N/-
X10(MRS)5 RES
SD
Inverter
1
R/L1
U
S/L2
V
IMM
T/L3
W
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
2 N/-
X10(MRS)5 RES
SD
99
Name (model)
Specification and structure <<Power regeneration mode 2 (for the FR-XC-(H)55K or lower)>>
MCCB MC
Power supply
MCCB
Fuse
R/L1 Fuse
S/L2 Fuse
T/L3
FR-XC
FR-XCG
R2/L12 R2/L12 S2/L22 S2/L22 T2/L32 T2/L32
P4
Fuse
DC reactor P/+ (FR-HEL)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
SOURCE SINK
R1/L11 S1/L21
Open collector
Earth (ground)
N/-
Fuse
RYA RYB RSO
SE
C B A
RES SOF LOH SD
PU connector
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
P1
N/-
X10(MRS) RES SD
U V
IMM
W
Connect between the inverter terminal P/+ and the converter terminal P4 and between the inverter terminal N/- and the converter terminal N/- for polarity consistency.
Connecting the opposite polarity of terminals P/+ and N/- will damage the converter and the inverter.
Confirm the correct phase sequence of three-phase current to connect between the reactor and the converter, and between the power supply and the reactor.
Incorrect connection will damage the converter.
Always connect between the power supply and terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 of the converter. Operating the inverter without
connecting them will damage the converter. A branch point to each of these terminals must be placed between the power supply and the
FR-HAL reactor.
Multifunction regeneration converter
FR-XC Dedicated stand-alone
reactor FR-XCL/FR-XCG
Install the FR-XCG reactor between the power supply and the converter as shown in the figure. For information to select an appropriate model, refer to the Instruction Manual. To connect a DC reactor, remove a jumper installed across terminals P1 and P/+ before installing the DC reactor. To use separate power supply for the control circuit, remove each jumper at terminal R1/L11 and terminal S1/L21. For selection of an MCCB for the converter, refer to the Instruction Manual. Install the UL listed fuse (refer to the Instruction Manual) on the input side of the FR-XCG reactor to meet the UL/cUL standards.
Dedicated box-type
Do not install an MCCB or MC between the reactors and the converter. Doing so disrupts proper operation.
8
reactor FR-XCB
� Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
This is an example of the outer appearance, which differs depending on the model.
<<Multifunction regeneration converter FR-XC (-PWM)>>
Options
�FR-XC-(H)7.5K, (H)11K, (H)15K 6 hole M5 screw
�FR-XC-(H)22K, (H)30K �FR-XC-(H)18.5K-PWM, (H)22K-PWM
FAN
2 6 hole
M5 screw
FAN
280 300 360 380
W1 W
93 293
Model
W W1
FR-XC-(H)7.5K, (H)11K 90 45
FR-XC-(H)15K
120 60
�FR-XC-(H)37K, (H)55K �FR-XC-(H)37K-PWM, (H)55K-PWM
2 10 hole M8 screw
60 150
�FR-XC-H75K �FR-XC-H75K-PWM 2 12 hole M10 screw
100 300
H1 H 805 830
W1
W
D
Model
W W1 H H1 D
FR-XC-(H)37K, H55K FR-XC-(H)37K-PWM, H55K-PWM
325
270
550
530
195
165
FR-XC-55K FR-XC-55K-PWM
370 300 620 600 250
220
380
100
D1 H max
Name (model)
<<Dedicated stand-alone reactor FR-XCL>>
W2 W1�1.5
Installation hole
D max
Multifunction regeneration converter
FR-XC Dedicated stand-alone
reactor FR-XCL/FR-XCG Dedicated box-type
reactor FR-XCB
W�2.5
Specification and structure
200 V class
Model
FR-XCL-7.5K FR-XCL-11K FR-XCL-15K FR-XCL-22K FR-XCL-30K FR-XCL-37K FR-XCL-55K
W W1 W2 H D
D1
Mounting Terminal Mass screw size screw size (kg)
165
55 192
8
125
120
80�2 73�2
130
130 140
100�2 110�2
M6
M5 M6
3.9 3.6 5.5 6.3
240 70
150 160 119�2
10.0
248 250
200 225
10
190
240 260
120�5 135�5
M8
M10
12.0 15.5
400 V class
Model
W W1 W2 H D
D1
Mounting Terminal Mass screw size screw size (kg)
FR-XCL-H7.5K FR-XCL-H11K 165 55
125
120
73�2 80�2
3.7
M5
4.2
FR-XCL-H15K
8
135 110�2 M6
6.0
FR-XCL-H22K FR-XCL-H30K
240 70
150
150 170
109�2 129�2
M6
9.0 12.0
FR-XCL-H37K FR-XCL-H55K
220 250
200 225
10
190
230
120�5 135�5
M8
M8
12.0 16.0
FR-XCL-H75K 300 270 10 335 200 140�2 M8
M8
50.0
FR-XCL-H90K 300 270 10 360 210 150�2 M8
M8
60.0
<<Dedicated stand-alone reactor FR-XCG>>
200 V class
Model
W W1 W2 H D
D1
Mounting Terminal Mass screw size screw size (kg)
D1 H max
W1�15
W2 Installation hole
FR-XCG-7.5K FR-XCG-11K 220 200 6
185
115 120
60�1.5 75�1.5
M5
M5
5 8
FR-XCG-15K
190 130 90�1.5
11
Rating plate
D max
FR-XCG-22K FR-XCG-30K FR-XCG-37K FR-XCG-55K
255 225 8 300 270 10
240 285
140 155 180 190
85�1.5 100�1.5 130�1.5
M6 M8
M6
16
20
M10
25 40
400 V class
8
Model
W W1 W2 H D
D1
Mounting Terminal Mass screw size screw size (kg)
Options
FR-XCG-H7.5K
115 60�1.5
5
W�2.5
FR-XCG-H11K 220 200 6 185 120 75�1.5 M5
M5
8
FR-XCG-H15K
FR-XCG-H22K FR-XCG-H30K
255
225
8
FR-XCG-H37K FR-XCG-H55K
300
270
10
240 285
130
140 180 190
90�1.5 85�1.5
100�1.5
130�1.5
M6 M8
M6 M8
11 16 20 25 40
FR-XCG-H75K 300 270 10 335 200 140�2 M8
M8
50
FR-XCG-H90K 300 270 10 360 210 150�2 M8
M8
60
101
Name (model)
<<Dedicated box-type reactor FR-XCB>> FR-XCB-(H)55K or less
2 d hole
H
H1
W1
W
D
FR-XCB-H75K
3 d hole
Specification and structure
200 V class
Model
W
FR-XCB-18.5K FR-XCB-22K
265
FR-XCB-37K FR-XCB-55K
350
400 V class
Model
W
FR-XCB-H18.5K FR-XCB-H22K
265
FR-XCB-H37K FR-XCB-H55K
350
FR-XCB-H75K 240
W1 H 200 470 270 600
W1 H 200 470 270 600 80 915
H1 D 440 275 575 330
H1 D 440 275 575 330 885 410
d
Screw size
Mass (kg)
10 M8
26.0
12 M10
56.9 68.5
d
Screw size
Mass (kg)
10 M8
26.9
12 M10 12 M10
63.0 73.0 120.0
H
H1
Multifunction regeneration converter
FR-XC Dedicated stand-alone
reactor FR-XCL/FR-XCG Dedicated box-type
reactor FR-XCB
W1 W1
8
W
D
<<Dedicated contactor box FR-MCB>>
2 8 hole
M6 screw
Options
350
325
185
240
320
<<Converter installation enclosure attachment FR-XCCP>>
2 d hole
Model FR-MCB-H150
Mass(kg) 17.0
Model
FR-XCCP01 FR-XCCP02 FR-XCCP03
W W1 H
110 60 130 90
330
160 120 410
H1 D
314
115 120
396 116
d
Screw size
6 M5
7 M6
H
H1
D W1
W
102
Name (model)
Specification and structure
Substantially suppresses power harmonics to obtain the equivalent capacity conversion coefficient K5 = 0 specified in "the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage" in Japan. The power regeneration function comes standard. The common converter driving with several inverters is possible. � Selection method
Select the model according to capacity of the inverter or the applicable motor, whichever larger. � Specifications
Model: FR-HC2-[]
7.5K
200 V 15K 30K 55K
400 V
75K
H7.5 K
H15K H30K H55K H75K
H110 K
H160 K
H220 K
H280 K
H400 K
H560 K
Applicable inverter
capacity(ND rating)
3.7K to 7.5K
7.5K to 15K
15K to 30K
30K to 55K
37K to 75K
Rated input Three-phase 200 V to 220 V voltage/ 50 Hz
frequency 200 V to 230 V 60 Hz
3.7K 7.5K 15K to to to 7.5K 15K 30K
30K to 55K
37K to 75K
55K to 110K
90K to 160K
110K to 220K
Three-phase 380 V to 460 V 50/60 Hz
160K to 280K
200K to 400K
280K to 560K
Rated input current (A)
33
61 115 215 278 17 31 57 110 139 203 290 397 506 716 993
High power factor converter FR-HC2-
The total capacity of the connected inverters. If a high power factor converter (FR-HC2) is purchased, it comes with reactor 1 (FR-HCL21), reactor 2 (FR-HCL22), and an outside box
(FR-HCB2). Do not connect the DC reactor to the inverter when using a high power factor converter. (If an H280K or higher is purchased, it comes with FR-HCL21, FR-HCL22, FR-HCC2, FR-HCR2, and FR-HCM2.)
� Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
High power factor con-
Capacity
verter FR-HC2
Reactor 1 FR-HCL21
Reactor 2 FR-HCL22
Outside box FR-HCB2
Voltage
W
H
D
W
H
D
W
H
D
W
H
D
7.5K 220 15K 250
260 400
170 190
132 162
150 172
100 126
237.5 230 257.5 260
140 165
190
320
165
200 V
30K 325 55K 370
550 620
195 250
195 210
210 180
150 342.5 305 200.5 432.5 380
180 280
270
450
203
75K 465 620 300 240 215 215.5 474 460 280 400 450 250
H7.5K 220 300 190 132 140 100 237.5 220 140
H15K 220 300 190 162 170 126 257.5 260 165 190 320 165
H30K 325 550 195 182 195 101 342.5 300 180
H55K 370 670 250 282.5 245 165 392.5 365 200 270 450 203 H75K 325 620 250 210 175 210.5 430 395 280 300 350 250
8
400 V
H110K 465 620 300 240 230 220 500 440 370 350 450 380
Options
H160K 498 H220K 498
1010 380 1010 380
280 330
295 335
274.5 560 289.5 620
520 620
430 480
400
450
440
H280K 680 1010 380 330 335 321 690 700 560 -
-
-
H400K 790 1330 440 402 460 550 632 675 705 -
-
-
H560K 790 1330 440 452 545 645 632 720 745 -
-
-
High power factor converter
P.CPY PWR REGEN....... DRIVE
PSCLR
FAN
Reactor 1, Reactor 2
Outside box
H H
H
W
D
W
D
W
D
Install reactors (FR-HCL21 and 22) on a horizontal surface. The H280K or higher are not equipped with FR-HCB2. A filter capacitor and inrush current limit resistors are provided instead.
103
Name (model) Surge voltage suppression filter
FR-ASF
Specification and structure
A surge voltage suppression filter limits surge voltage applied to motor terminals when driving the 400 V class motor by the inverter. � Selection method
Select the model according to the applied motor capacity.
� Specifications
Model: FR-ASF-[]
H1.5K
H3.7K
H7.5K
400 V H15K
H22K
H37K H55K
Applicable motor capacity (kW) 0.4 to 1.5 2.2 to 3.7 5.5 to 7.5 11 to 15 18.5 to 22 30 to 37 45 to 55
Rated input current (A)
4.0
9.0
17.0 31.0
43.0
71.0
110.0
Overload current rating
150% 60 s, 200% 0.5 s
Rated input AC voltage
Three-phase 380 V to 460 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Maximum AC voltage fluctuation Three-phase 506 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Maximum frequency
400 Hz
PWM frequency permissible range 0.5 kHz to 14.5 kHz
Maximum wiring length between the filter-motor
300 m
Approx. mass (kg)
8.0
11.0
20.0
28.0
38.0
59.0
78.0
Surrounding air temperature -10�C to +50�C (non-freezing)
Surrounding air humidity 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Atmosphere
Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt, etc.)
Altitude/vibration
Maximum 1000 m, 5.9 m/s2 or less at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
Determined by the specification of the connected inverter (400 V class).
� Connection diagram
Threephase AC power supply
MCCB
Within 5 m
MC
Inverter
R
U
S
V
T
W
Within 300 m
FR-ASF
UX VY WZ
Motor IM
Environment H
� Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
8
Model
W H D
FR-ASF-H1.5K 221 193 160
FR-ASF-H3.7K 221 200 180
Options
FR-ASF-H7.5K 281 250 215
FR-ASF-H15K 336 265 290
FR-ASF-H22K 336 345 354
FR-ASF-H37K 376 464 429
FR-ASF-H55K 396 464 594
W
D
This indicates the maximum dimension.
The H15K or higher has a different shape.
104
Name (model)
Specification and structure
Limits surge voltage applied to motor terminals when driving a 400 V class motor with an inverter. This filter is compatible with the 5.5 to 37 kW motors. � Selection method
Select the model according to the applied motor capacity.
� Specifications
Model: FR-BMF-H[]K
7.5
15
22
37
Applicable motor capacity (kW)
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
Rated current (A)
17
31
43
71
Overload current rating 150% 60 s, 200% 0.5 s (inverse-time characteristics)
Rated AC input voltage Three-phase 380 to 480 V
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation
323 to 528 V
Maximum frequency 120 Hz
PWM carrier frequency 2 kHz or lower
Protective structure (JEM 1030)
Open type (IP00)
Cooling system
Self-cooling
Maximum wiring length 100m or lower
Approx. mass (kg) 5.5
9.5
11.5
19
Environment
Surrounding air temperature
-10�C to +50�C (non-freezing)
Surrounding air humidity
90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Atmosphere
Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt, etc.)
Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000 m, 5.9 m/s2 or less at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
Indicates the maximum capacity applicable with the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor. (PM motors are not applicable.)
Determined by the specification of the connected inverter (400 V class).
Set the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection to 2 kHz or less.
When an inverter has a filter mounted on its back, do not use such an inverter on a moving object or in a place that vibrates (exceeding
1.96 m/s2).
Surge voltage
� Connection diagram
suppression filter
within 100m
FR-BMF
Three-
MCCB MC Inverter FR-BMF
RU
X
phase
SV
Y
M
AC power supply
TW
Z
T*
TH0
8
TH1 ON OFF MC
Options
MC * Install a step-down transformer.
� Outline dimension (Unit: mm)
FR-BMF-H7.5K
FR-BMF-H15K, H22K
230
208
4 M5
195 150
4 M4
2 6 hole
75 45 13.5
260
230
195
4 M8
180
2 10 hole
100 50 31
FR-BMF-H37K
245
2 10 hole
6 M5
138
525
550
245
285
245
457
500
480
380
325
340
325
2.3
Terminal layout X Y Z TH0 TH1
Earth terminal (M5)
Rating plate
149.5
60
7.5
370
7.5
6
6
Red White Blue Crimping terminal 5.5-4 (U) (V) (W) Isolation cap color
Main terminal block (M4) 2.3
Control terminal block (M3)
165
205
Earth terminal (M6)
Terminal layout
X YZ
TH0 TH1
80
33
420
10
10
10
Red White Blue (U) (V) (W) Isolation cap color
Main terminal block (M5)
2.3
Crimping terminal: 8-6 Control terminal block (M3)
Rating plate
Earth terminal (M8)
450
2.3
Red White Blue (U) (V) (W) Isolation cap color
Crimping terminal 22-6
Main terminal block (M6)
12.5
Rating
Terminal layout
plate
XYZ
TH0 TH1
10 80
130
Control terminal block (M3)
2.3
105
Low-Voltage Switchgear/Cables
Mitsubishi Electric Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers WS-V Series
Our main series of products in the industry's smallest class with high breaking capability enabled by a new breaking technology. The new WS-V series breaker has enhanced usability by further standardizing internal parts, meets international standards, and addresses environmental and energy-saving issues.
Features A 54-mm-wide body, which belongs to the smallest class in the industry
The compact body allows for downsizing of the equipment and enclosure. The breakers have been downsized to 54 mm wide and 52 mm depth (decreased by 16 mm compared with S-class general-purpose products).
S-class
Volume ratio 55%
(Compared with our
preceding model)
When multiple units are used, the width becomes significantly smaller.
NF32-SV 10 circuits NF32-CVF 10 circuits
750mm Downsize 210mm
540mm
C-class
Volume ratio 42%
(Compared with our
preceding model)
Before (S-class, C-class)
Conforms to various global standards
� New JIS standard: JIS C 8201-2-1 (NF) � EN (Europe): EN 60947-2, CE marking
Annex 1 and Annex 2
(T�V certification, self declaration)
� Electrical Appliances and Materials Safety � GB standard (China): GB/T 14048.2 CCC
9
Act (PSE) � IEC standard: IEC 60947-2
certification � Safety certification (Korea): KC marking
Three-phase power supply supported by CE/CCC marked earth leakage circuit breakers
GB/T 14048.2-2008 was established in China, requiring the earth leakage circuit breaker to fulfill its function even if a phase is lost as is the case with the EN standard in Europe. CE/CCC marked earth leakage circuit breakers of the WS-V series support three phase power supply. Compliance with the revised standard is certified.
Lineup of UL 489 listed circuit breakers with 54 mm width "Small Fit"
The compact breakers contribute to a size reduction of machines, and IEC 35 mm rail mounting is standard.
Low-Voltage Switchgear/Cables
For security and standard compliance of machines, F-type and Vtype operating handles are available for breakers with 54 mm width.
NF50-SVFU
NF100-CVFU
NV50-SVFU
NV100-CVFU
Lineup of UL 489 listed circuit breakers for 480 V AC "High Performance"
The breaking capacity has been improved to satisfy the request for SCCR upgrading.
NF125-SVU NF125-HVU NF250-CVU NF250-SVU NF250-HVU
Breaking capacity of UL 489 listed circuit breakers for 480 V AC (UL 489) (Example of 240 V AC) NF125-SVU/NV125-SVU ................................50 kA NF125-HVU/NV125-HVU ................................100 kA NF250-CVU/NV250-CVU ................................35 kA NF250-SVU/NV250-SVU ................................65 kA NF250-HVU/NV250-HVU ................................100 kA
106
Mitsubishi Electric Magnetic Motor Starters and Magnetic Contactors MS-T Series
Mitsubishi Electric magnetic motor starters have been newly designed and the MS-T series has been released. The MS-T series is smaller than ever, enabling more compact control panel. The MS-T series is suitable for other Mitsubishi Electric FA equipment. In addition, the MS-T conforms to a variety of global standards, supporting the global use.
Features Compact
General-purpose magnetic contactor with smallest width in the industry. The width of MS-T series is reduced by 32% as compared to the prior MS-N series, enabling a more compact panel. For selection, refer to page 110.
Based on Mitsubishi Electric research as of November 2020 in the general-purpose magnetic contactor industry for 10 A-frame class.
[Unit: mm]
S-T10
Frame size
11A
43
13A
43
53
20A
63
25A
75
32A
MS-N series
New MS-T series Frame size MS-N series
New MS-T series
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
13
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
14
S-N10 36
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
13
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
14
13 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
21
14 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
22
S-N11 (Auxiliary 1-pole)
S-N12 (Auxiliary 2-pole)
44
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
13
21
14
22
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
S-N20 44
1/L1 13 21 22 14
2/T1
3/L2 4/T2
5/L3 43 31 32 44
6/T3
S-N25 63
/POF 43
7mm S-T10 35A 75
9mm
S-T12 (Auxiliary 2-pole)
50A
88
88
19mm
S-T20
65A
88
88
1/L1 13 21 22 14
2/T1
3/L2 4/T2
5/L3 43 31 32 44
6/T3
S-N35 75
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
13 21
43 31
22
32
14
44
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
S-N50
75
S-N50AE
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
13
43
21
31
22
32
14
44
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
S-N65
88
S-N65AE
S-T35
S-T50
13mm
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
S-T65
12mm S-T25
80A
100
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
/FX
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
S-T32
100A
100
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
S-N80 88
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3 12mm
S-T80
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
S-N95 100
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
S-T100
9
Low-Voltage Switchgear/Cables
Standardization
� Terminal covers are provided as standard to ensure safety inside the enclosure. Users do not have to make arrangements to specify and obtain options separately. Covers are provided also for the auxiliary contact unit. Users can reduce their inventory.
� Widened range of operation coil ratings (AC operated model) The widened range reduces the number of operation coil rating types from 13 (MS-N series) to 7. The reduced number of the operation coil types enables more simplified customers' ordering process and the faster delivery.
� Customers can select the operation coil more easily.
(Conventional product)
(MS-T series)
Covers + Contactor (Conventional product)
Catostavtacenhrsdeadarrdaes. MS-T series
Coil designation
24 VAC 48 VAC 100 VAC 120 VAC 127 VAC 200 VAC 220 VAC 230 VAC 260 VAC 380 VAC 400 VAC 440 VAC 500 VAC
Rated voltage [V]
50 Hz
60 Hz
24
24
48 to 50
48 to 50
100
100 to 110
110 to 120 115 to 120
125 to 127
127
200
200 to 220
208 to 220
220
220 to 240 230 to 240
240 to 260 260 to 280
346 to 380
380
380 to 415 400 to 440
415440 460 to 480
500
500 to 550
Coil Rated voltage [V] designation 50 Hz/60 Hz
24 VAC
24
48 VAC
48 to 50
100 VAC 100 to 127
200 VAC 200 to 240
300 VAC 260 to 300
*DOPUGTFJBMFHDSMSJBFMBJUDUUJBFOUJUEHPFTO
400 VAC 380 to 440
500 VAC 460 to 550
Seven types are available without change for
the 50 A frame model or higher.
Global Standard
� Conforms to various global standards Our magnetic contactors are certified as compliant not only with major international standards such as IEC, JIS, UL, CE, and CCC but also with ship classification standards and country specific standards. This will help our customers expand their business overseas.
Applicable Standard
Safety Standard
International
Japan
Europe
China
U.S.A./ Canada
Standard
IEC
JIS
EN EC Directive
Certification body
GB
Compliant with the requirements for mirror contacts in standards such as IEC 60947-4-1, and T�V-certified.
107
Spring Clamp Terminal Models Available for Mitsubishi Electric Magnetic Contactor and Magnetic Relay
Spring clamp terminal: Easy-to-connect terminal that ensures connection with the contact pressure of the spring just by pushing wire into the conductive terminal. Solid wires and ferrules can be connected simply by inserting them into the terminals. Stranded wires can be connected by opening the spring with a tool, inserting wire, and removing the tool.
Features
Key features of the screwless terminals:
� Significant reduction in the time required for wiring
Comparison with the terminal screw model (with round crimp terminal)
Wiring with ferrules: 22% reduction
Wiring with solid or stranded wire: 52% reduction
Reduction in the time required for wiring
Wiring performed by non-experts (with 2-year experience) (The research conducted by
Japan Switchboard & control system Industries Association)
� Easy wiring for whoever works on
S-T12SQ
Push-in connection eliminates the need for the screw-tightening skills.
� Enhanced maintenance efficiency
Screw retightening is not necessary for installation and maintenance of
enclosures and machines.
� Reliable wire connection
There is no risk of terminal screw loosening due to vibration or shocks, or long-term service.
Motor Circuit Breaker MMP-T Series
Motor circuit protection (against overload / phase loss / short-circuit) is achievable the MMP-T series alone. The wire-saving, space-saving design enables downsizing of the enclosure. The MMP-T series can be used in combination with the MS-T series.
22% reduction
52% reduction
Round crimp terminal Ferrule 4PMJE TUSBOEFE XJSF
Screw
Spring clamp terminal
terminal
Features What is the motor circuit breaker?
MMP-T32
Space-saving design for downsizing of the enclosure
The motor circuit breaker, applicable to the motor circuit, has the functions of a circuit breaker and a thermal overload relay in one unit. The motor circuit
Example of space saving
9
breaker provides protection against overload, phase loss, and short circuit.
Motor circuit configuration using a circuit breaker and a
Motor circuit configuration using a motor circuit breaker and a
magnetic contactor
magnetic contactor
Conventional system Inside the enclosure
Motor circuit breakers system Inside the enclosure
With motor circuit breakers
Disconnection
Disconnection
Circuit opening/ closing
Short-circuit protection
Device protection
Circuit breaker
Motor control
Magnetic contactor
Circuit opening/ closing
Short-circuit protection
Motor circuit breaker
Device protection
Overload protection
'VPSUGIUFISFEFPOXDOMPTTJ[VJOSFH
Low-Voltage Switchgear/Cables
Overload protection Thermal overload relay
Magnetic contactor
Motor control
M
M
Wire saving
Using a connection conductor unit (option) for connecting a motor circuit breaker and a contactor reduces work hours required for wiring. A connection conductor unit for the high sensitivity contactor (SD-Q) is also available. (Model: UT-MQ12)
Example of wire saving Conductor unit connection example
$POOFDUJPO DPOEVDUPS VOJU
.BHOFUJD DPOUBDUPS DPJMUFSNJOBM TFDUJPO
Compliance to major standards support customers' overseas business
UT-MQ12 application example
� Compliance with major global standards Not only major international standards such as IEC, JIS, UL, CE, and CCC but also other national standards are certified. This will help our
customers expand their business in foreign countries.
Applicable Standard
Safety Standard
International
Japan
Europe
China
U.S.A./ Canada
Standard
IEC
JIS
EN EC Directive
Certification body
GB
� Compliant with the requirements for mirror contacts in standards such as IEC 60947-4-1, and T�V-certified.
108
Selecting the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage circuit breaker
When using an earth leakage circuit breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows, independently of the PWM carrier frequency.
� Breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression
<Example>
Rated sensitivity current
In10�(Ig1+Ign+Igi+Ig2+Igm)
5.5 mm2 5 m 5.5 mm2 50 m
� Standard breaker Rated sensitivity current
In10�{Ig1+Ign+Igi+3�(Ig2+Igm)}
Ig1, Ig2: Leakage currents in wire path during commercial power supply operation
ELB
Noise filter
Inverter
Ig1 Ign
M
I3 200 V
2.2 kW
Ig2
Igm
Ign: Leakage current of inverter input side noise filter Igm: Leakage current of motor during commercial power supply operation Igi: Leakage current of inverter unit
Example of leakage current of cable path per 1 km during the commercial power supply operation when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit
(200 V 60 Hz)
Leakage current example of three-phase induction motor during the commercial power supply operation
(200 V 60 Hz)
120
2.0
100
1.0
80
0.7
60
0.5
40
0.3
0.2
20
Igi
(a) Install the earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) on the input side of the inverter.
(b) In the connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current is blunt against a ground fault in the inverter output side. Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 61140 class 1 and other applicable standards)
Selection example (in the case of the above figure)
Leakage current Ig1 (mA)
Leakage current Ign (mA)
Breaker designed for harmonic and surge
suppression
Standard breaker
33�
5 m 1000 m
=0.17
0
Leakage currents (mA)
Leakage currents (mA)
0
2 3.5 8 14 2238 80150
5.5
30 60100
Cable size(mm2)
0.1 1.5 3.7 7.5 15223755 2.2 5.5 11 18.5 3045
Motor capacity (kW)
Leakage current Igi (mA) 1 Leakage current Ig2 (mA)
33�
50 m 1000 m
=1.65
leakage currents (mA)
leakage currents (mA)
Example of leakage current per 1 km during Leakage current example of three-
the commercial power supply operation
phase induction motor during the
Motor leakage current Igm (mA)
0.18
when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit commercial power supply operation
(Three-phase three-wire delta
(Totally-enclosed fan-cooled
Total leakage current (mA)
3.00
6.66
connection 400 V 60 Hz)
type motor 400 V 60 Hz)
Rated sensitivity current
120
2. 0
(mA)
30
100
100
1. 0
(Ig � 10)
80
0. 7
60
0. 5
40
0. 3
9
0. 2
20
0 2 3.5 8 142238 80150
5.5
30 60100
Cable size (mm2)
0. 1 1. 5 3. 7 7. 5 15223755 2. 2 5.5 1118. 53045
Motor capacity (kW)
For " " connection, the amount of leakage current is appox.1/3 of the above value.
Low-Voltage Switchgear/Cables
109
Molded case circuit breaker, magnetic contactor, cable gauge
Voltage
Three-phase 200 V
Motor output (kW)
Applicable inverter model
(ND rating)
0.1
FR-E820-0008(0.1K)
0.2
FR-E820-0015(0.2K)
0.4
FR-E820-0030(0.4K)
0.75
FR-E820-0050(0.75K)
1.5
FR-E820-0080(1.5K)
2.2
FR-E820-0110(2.2K)
3.7
FR-E820-0175(3.7K)
5.5
FR-E820-0240(5.5K)
7.5
FR-E820-0330(7.5K)
11
FR-E820-0470(11K)
15
FR-E820-0600(15K)
18.5
FR-E820-0760(18.5K)
22
FR-E820-0900(22K)
0.4
FR-E840-0016(0.4K)
0.75
FR-E840-0026(0.75K)
1.5
FR-E840-0040(1.5K)
2.2
FR-E840-0060(2.2K)
3.7
FR-E840-0095(3.7K)
5.5
FR-E840-0120(5.5K)
7.5
FR-E840-0170(7.5K)
11
FR-E840-0230(11K)
15
FR-E840-0300(15K)
18.5
FR-E840-0380(18.5K)
22
FR-E840-0440(22K)
0.75
FR-E860-0017(0.75K)
1.5
FR-E860-0027(1.5K)
2.2
FR-E860-0040(2.2K)
3.7
FR-E860-0061(3.7K)
5.5
FR-E860-0090(5.5K)
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) (NF, NV type)
Input side magnetic contactor
Recommended cable gauge (mm2) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
Power factor improving (AC or DC) reac- Power factor improving (AC Power factor improving (AC U, V, W
tor connection
or DC) reactor connection or DC) reactor connection
Without
With
Without
With
Without
With
5A
5A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
5A
5A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
5A
5A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
10A
10A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
15A
15A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
20A
15A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
30A
30A
S-T21
S-T10
3.5
3.5
3.5
50A
40A
S-T35
S-T21
5.5
5.5
5.5
60A
50A
S-T35
S-T35
14
8
8
75A
75A
S-T35
S-T35
14
14
14
125A
100A
S-T50
S-T50
22
22
22
150A
125A
S-T65
S-T50
38
22
22
175A
150A
S-T100
S-T65
38
38
38
5A
5A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
5A
5A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
10A
10A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
15A
10A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
20A
15A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
30A
20A
S-T21
S-T12
3.5
2
2
30A
30A
S-T21
S-T21
3.5
3.5
3.5
50A
40A
S-T21
S-T21
5.5
5.5
5.5
60A
50A
S-T35
S-T21
8
8
8
75A
60A
S-T35
S-T35
14
8
8
100A
75A
S-T35
S-T35
14
14
14
5A
5A
3A
3A
2
2
2
10A
5A
3A
5A
2
2
2
10A
10A
5A
7A
2
2
2
15A
10A
7A
10A
2
2
2
20A
15A
10A
15A
2
2
2
Three-phase 400 V
9
7.5
FR-E860-0120(7.5K)
30A
0.1
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) 5A
20A 5A
15A
20A
3.5
2
2
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
0.2
FR-E820S-0015(0.2K) 5A
5A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
0.4
FR-E820S-0030(0.4K) 10A
10A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
0.75
FR-E820S-0050(0.75K) 15A
10A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
1.5
FR-E820S-0080(1.5K) 20A
20A
S-T10
S-T10
2
2
2
2.2
FR-E820S-0110(2.2K) 40A
30A
S-T21
S-T10
3.5
3.5
2
Single-phase 200 V Three-phase 575 V
Low-Voltage Switchgear/Cables
Assumes the use of a 4-pole standard motor. Select an MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per inverter.
(For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the document enclosed with the product
and select appropriate fuses.)
MCCB INV M MCCB INV M
The magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor is used for emergency stops during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
If using an MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using it on the motor side during commercial power supply operation, select an MC with the class AC-3 rated
current for the rated motor current.
Cables
The gauge of the cable with the continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90�C or higher. (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene
insulated cable), etc.). It assumes a surrounding air temperature of 40�C or lower and in-enclosure wiring.
NOTE
� When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the inverter model, and select cables and reactors according to the motor output.
� When the breaker on the inverter's input side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter etc. The cause of the trip must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the breaker.
110
MEMO
111
Precaution on Selection and Operation
10
Precaution on Selection and Operation
Precautions for use
Safety instructions
� To use the product safely and correctly, make sure to read the "Instruction Manual" before the use.
� This product has not been designed or manufactured for use with any equipment or system operated under life-threatening conditions.
� Please contact our sales representative when considering using this product in special applications such as passenger mobile, medical, aerospace, nuclear, power or undersea relay equipment or system.
� Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality control, install safety devices to prevent serious accidents when it is used in facilities where breakdowns of the product or other failures are likely to cause a serious accident.
� Do not use the inverter for a load other than the three-phase induction motor and the PM motor.
� Do not connect a IPM motor in the induction motor control settings (initial settings). Do not use an induction motor in the IPM sensorless vector control settings. It will cause a failure.
Operation
� When a magnetic contactor (MC) is installed on the input side, do not use the MC for frequent starting/stopping. Otherwise the inverter may be damaged.
� When a fault occurs in the inverter, the protective function is activated to stop the inverter output. However, the motor cannot be immediately stopped. For machinery and equipment that require an immediate stop, provide a mechanical stop/holding mechanism.
� Even after turning OFF the inverter, it takes time to discharge the capacitor. Before performing an inspection, wait 10 minutes or longer after the power supply turns OFF, then check the voltage using a tester, etc.
� To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the inverter and the system against unauthorized access, DoS attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from external devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions. We shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving inverter trouble and system trouble by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.
DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.
� For CC-Link IE TSN communication, the time required to establish communication after power-on of the master station or the inverter may vary depending on the circumstances. Normally it takes several seconds to establish communication. Depending on device status on the line, link-up processing is repeated and may increase the time.
Wiring
� Applying the power to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W) causes a damage to the inverter. Before power-on, thoroughly check the wiring and sequence to prevent incorrect wiring, etc.
� Terminals P/+, P1, N/-, and PR are for connection to dedicated options and DC power supplies. Do not connect anything other than a dedicated option and DC power supply. Do not shortcircuit between the frequency setting power supply terminal 10 and the common terminal 5, and between terminals PC and SD.
� To remove the wire connected to the control circuit terminal, pull the wire while pressing down the open/close button firmly with a flathead screwdriver. Otherwise, the terminal block may be damaged.
� To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10cm or more away from the power cables. Also, separate the main circuit cables at the input side from the main circuit cables at the output side.
� After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter. Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
� Set the voltage/current input switch correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
� The output of the single-phase power input model is three-phase 200 V.
Power supply
� When the inverter is
connected near a large-
capacity power transformer (500 kVA or more) or when a power factor correction capacitor is to be switched over, an excessive peak current
1500
Power supply system 1000 capacity (kVA)
500
Range requiring installation of the reactor
may flow in the power
input circuit, damaging the inverter. To prevent this, always install an optional
0 Wiring length (m) 10
AC reactor (FR-HAL).
� If surge voltage occurs in the power supply system, this surge
energy may flow into an inverter, and the inverter may display the
overvoltage protection (E. OV[]) and trip. To prevent this, install an
optional AC reactor (FR-HAL).
Installation
� Install the inverter in a clean place with no floating oil mist, cotton fly, dust and dirt, etc. Alternatively, install the inverter inside the "sealed type" enclosure that prevents entry of suspended substances. For installation in the enclosure, decide the cooling method and the enclosure size to keep the surrounding air temperature of the inverter/the converter unit within the permissible range (for specifications, refer to page 69).
� Some parts of the inverter/the converter unit become extremely hot. Do not install the inverter to inflammable materials (wood etc.).
� Attach the inverter vertically.
Setting
� Depending on the parameter setting, high-speed operation (up to 590 Hz) is available. Incorrect setting will lead to a dangerous situation. Set the upper limit by using the upper frequency limit setting.
� Setting the DC injection brake operation voltage and operating time larger than their initial values causes motor overheating (electronic thermal O/L relay trip).
� Do not set Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty except for using the optional brake resistor. This function is used to protect the brake resistor from overheating. Do not set the value exceeding permissible duty of the brake resistor.
112
Real sensorless vector control
� Under Real sensorless vector control, always execute offline auto tuning before starting operations.
� The speed command setting range under Real sensorless vector control is 0 to 400 Hz.
� The selectable carrier frequencies under Real sensorless vector control are 2, 6, 10, and 14 kHz.
� Torque control is not available in the low-speed (about 10 Hz or less) regenerative range, or in the low speed with the light load (about 5 Hz or less with about 20% or less of the rated torque). Select the vector control.
� The motor may start running at a low speed even when the start signal (STF or STR) is not input. The motor may run also at a low speed when the speed limit value = 0 with a start command input. Confirm that the motor running does not cause any safety problems. Under torque control, do not switch between the forward rotation command (STF) and reverse rotation command (STR). The overcurrent trip (E. OC[]) or opposite rotation deceleration fault (E.11) occurs.
� If the inverter may restart during coasting under Real sensorless vector control, set the automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure function to enable frequency search (Pr.57 "9999",
Pr.162 = "10"). � Under Real sensorless vector control, sufficient torque may not
be obtained in the extremely low-speed range of about 2 Hz or less. � The approximate speed control range is as described below. Power drive: 1:200 (2, 4, 6 poles), 0.3 Hz or more for 60 Hz rating. 1:30 (8, 10 poles), 2 Hz or more for 60 Hz rating Regenerative driving: 1:12 (2 to 10 poles), 5 Hz or more for 60 Hz rating
Precautions for use of IPM motor
When using the IPM motor, the following precautions must be observed
as well.
Safety instructions
� Do not use an IPM motor for an application where the motor is driven by the load
Combination of motor and inverter
� For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (Note that the motor rated current should be 0.4 kW or higher (0.1 kW or higher for the 200 V class).) If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
� Only one IPM motor can be connected to an inverter. � An IPM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.
Installation
� While power is ON or for some time after power-OFF, do not touch the motor since the motor may be extremely hot. Touching these devices may cause a burn.
Wiring
� Applying the commercial power supply to input terminals (U, V, W) of a motor will burn the motor. The motor must be connected with the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter.
� An IPM motor is a motor with permanent magnets embedded inside. High voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the motor is running. Before wiring or inspection, confirm that the motor is stopped. In an application, such a as fan or blower, where the motor is driven by the load, a low-voltage manual contactor must be connected at the inverter's output side, and wiring and inspection must be performed while the contactor is open. Otherwise an electric shock may be caused. The inverter power must be turned ON before closing the contacts of the contactor at the output side.
� Match the input terminals (U, V, W) of the motor and the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter when connecting.
� Use the following length of wiring or shorter when connecting an IPM motor.
Operation
� About 0.1 s (magnetic pole detection time) takes to start a motor after inputting a start signal.
� An IPM motor is a motor with embedded permanent magnets. Regression voltage is generated when the motor coasts at an instantaneous power failure or other incidents. The inverter's DC bus voltage increases if the motor coasts fast in this condition. When using the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function, it is recommended to also use the regeneration avoidance operation to make startups stable.
� Thus, the relation between the rotation speed and the frequency setting is: Rotation speed = 120 � frequency setting value / number of motor poles
10
Precaution on Selection and Operation
113
10
Connection with machine
Direct connection
� When installing, align the motor shaft center and the machine shaft. Insert a liner underneath the motor or the machine legs as
required to make a perfect alignment.
Level meter
2 Level meter
B
A 1
Good
Bad
Bad
Set so that the A dimensions become the same dimension even
when any position is measured by feeler gauge. (inequality in A
width 3/100 mm or lower)
Do not set parts with a vertical gap like B (maximum runoff
degree: 3/100 mm).
NOTE
� When a fan or blower is directly connected to the motor shaft or to the machine, the machine side may become unbalanced. When the unbalanced degree becomes larger, the motor vibration becomes larger and may result in a damage of the bearing or other area. The balance quality with the machine should meet the class G2.5 or lower of JIS B0905 (the Balance Quality Requirements of Rigid Rotors).
Connected by belt
� When installing, place the motor shaft and the machine shaft in parallel, and mount them to a position where their pulley centers are aligned. Their pulley centers should also have a right angle to each shaft.
� An excessively stretched belt may damage the bearing and break the shafts. A loose belt may slip off and easily deteriorate. A flat belt should be rotated lightly when it is pulled by one hand. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the motor.
Connected by gear couplings
Place the motor and machine shafts in parallel, and engage the gear teeth properly.
Permissible vibration during operation
During operation, the motor coupled to a load machine may vibrate according to the degree of coupling between the motor and the load, and the degree of vibration created by the load. The degree of the motor's vibration varies depending on the condition of the foundations and baseplate of the motor. If the motor has higher vibration than the permissible level, investigate the cause, take measure, and take action.
Selection precautions
Inverter capacity selection
� When operating a special motor or multiple motors in parallel by one inverter, select the inverter capacity so that 1.05 times of the total of the rated motor current becomes less than the rated output current of the inverter. (Multiple PM motors cannot be connected to an inverter.)
� Do not set Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty except for using the optional brake resistor. This function is used to protect the brake resistor from overheating. Do not set the value exceeding permissible duty of the brake resistor.
Starting torque of the motor
� The starting and acceleration characteristics of the motor driven by an inverter are restricted by the overload current rating of the inverter. In general, the torque characteristic has small value compared to when the motor is started by a commercial power supply. When a large starting torque is required, and torque boost adjustment, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and Vector control cannot generate the sufficient torque, increase both the motor and inverter capacities.
Acceleration/deceleration time
� The motor acceleration/deceleration time is decided by the torque generated by the motor, load torque, and moment of inertia (J) of load.
� The required time may increase when the torque limit function or stall prevention function operates during acceleration/ deceleration. In such a case, set the acceleration/deceleration time longer.
� To shorten the acceleration/deceleration time, increase the torque boost value (too large setting value may activate the stall prevention function, resulting in longer acceleration time at starting on the contrary). Alternatively, use Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or vector control, or select the larger inverter and motor capacities. To decrease the deceleration time, it is necessary to add optional brake resistor MRS type, MYS type, or FR-ABR (for the 0.4K or higher), the brake unit (FR-BU2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC), or a similar device to absorb braking energy.
Power transfer mechanisms (reduction gear, belt,
chain, etc.)
� Caution is required for the low-speed continuous operation of the motor with an oil lubricated gear box, transmission, reduction gear, etc. in the power transfer mechanism. Such an operation may degrade the oil lubrication and cause seizing. On the other hand, the high-speed operation at more than 60 Hz may cause problems with the noise of the power transfer mechanism, life, or insufficient strength due to centrifugal force, etc. Fully take necessary precautions.
Instructions for overload operation
� When performing frequent starts/stops by the inverter, rise/fall in the temperature of the transistor element of the inverter will repeat due to a repeated flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing current at locked condition, starting current, etc. Reducing current may extend the service life but may also cause torque shortage, which leads to a start failure. Adding a margin to the current can eliminate such a condition. For an induction motor, use an inverter of a higher capacity (up to two ranks for the ND rating). For an PM motor, use an inverter and PM motor of higher capacities.
Precaution on Selection and Operation
114
Precautions on peripheral device
selection
Selection and installation of molded case
circuit breaker
Install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power receiving side to protect the wiring at the inverter input side. Select an MCCB according to the inverter power supply side power factor, which depends on the power supply voltage, output frequency and load. Refer to page 110. Especially for a completely electromagnetic MCCB, a slightly large capacity must be selected since its operation characteristic varies with harmonic currents. (Check the reference material of the applicable breaker.) As an earth leakage circuit breaker, use the Mitsubishi Electric earth leakage circuit breaker designed for harmonics and surge suppression. (Refer to page 109.) When installing a molded case circuit breaker on the inverter output side, contact the manufacturer of each product for selection.
Handling of the input side magnetic contactor
(MC)
� For the operation using external terminals (using terminal STF or STR), install the input-side magnetic contactor to prevent accidents due to automatic restart when the power is restored after power failures such as an instantaneous power failure, or for safety during maintenance works. Do not use this magnetic contactor for frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. (The switching life of the converter part is about 1 million times.) In the operation by parameter unit, the automatic restart after power restoration is not performed and the magnetic contactor cannot be used to start the motor. The input-side magnetic contactor can stop the motor. However, the regenerative brake of the inverter does not operate, and the motor coasts to a stop.
� Installation of a magnetic contactor at the input side is recommended. A magnetic contactor avoids overheat or burnout of a brake resistor when heat capacity of the resistor is insufficient or a brake regenerative transistor is damaged with short while connecting an optional brake resistor. In this case, shut-off the magnetic contactor when fault occurs and inverter trips.
Handling of the output side magnetic contactor
(MC)
� Switch the MC between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the magnetic contactor is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will activate. When an MC is provided to switch to a commercial power supply, switch it ON/ OFF after the inverter and motor have stopped.
� Do not install a magnetic contactor at the inverter's output side when using a PM motor.
Installation of thermal relay
In order to protect the motor from overheating, the inverter has an electronic thermal O/L relay. However, install an external thermal overcurrent relay (OCR) between the inverter and motors to operate several motors or a multi-pole motor with one inverter. In this case, set 0 A to the electronic thermal O/L relay setting of the inverter. For the external thermal overcurrent relay, determine the setting value in consideration of the current indicated on the motor's rating plate and the line-to-line leakage current. (Refer to page 117.) Self cooling ability of a motor reduces in the low-speed operation. Installation of a thermal protector or a use of a motor with built-in thermistor is recommended.
Output side measuring instrument
When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is long, especially for the 400 V class, small-capacity models, the meters and CTs may generate heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore, choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the current rating. When measuring and displaying the output voltage and output current of the inverter, use of terminals AM and 5 output function of the inverter is recommended.
Disuse of power factor improving capacitor
(power factor correction capacitor)
The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side may be overheated or damaged by the harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since an excessive current flows in the inverter to activate overcurrent protection, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor. To improve the power factor, use an AC reactor (on page 89), a DC reactor (on page 90), or a high power factor converter (on page 103).
Electrical corrosion of the bearing
When a motor is driven by the inverter, axial voltage is generated on the motor shaft, which may cause electrical corrosion of the bearing in rare cases depending on the wiring, load, operating conditions of the motor or specific inverter settings (high carrier frequency, use of a capacitive filter ). Contact your sales representative to take appropriate countermeasures for the motor. The following shows examples of countermeasures for the inverter. � Decrease the carrier frequency. � Remove the capacitive filter. � Provide a common mode choke on the output side of the
inverter. (This is effective regardless of the use of the capacitive filter.)
Mitsubishi Electric capacitive filter: FR-BIF, SF[], FR-E5NF-[], FR-S5NFSA[], FR-BFP2-[]
Recommended common mode choke: FT-3KM F series FINEMET� common mode choke cores manufactured by Hitachi Metals, Ltd. FINEMET is a registered trademark of Hitachi Metals, Ltd.
Precaution on Selection and Operation
10
115
10
Precaution on Selection and Operation
Cable gauge and wiring distance
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, during the output of a low frequency in particular, use a large cable gauge for the main circuit cable to suppress the voltage drop to 2% or less. (The table on page 110 indicates a selection example for the wiring length of 20 m.) Especially for long-distance wiring or wiring with shielded cables, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused by stray capacitances of the wiring, leading to an incorrect activation of the overcurrent protective function. Refer to the maximum wiring length shown in the following table. (When multiple motors are connected, use the total wiring length shown in the table or shorter)
4IJFMEFE 6OTIJFMEFE Cable type
Pr.72 setting (carrier fre-
quency)
Voltage class
0.1K
0.2K
0.4K
0.75K
1.5K
2.2K
3.7K or higher
200V L)[
PSMPXFS 400V
200 200 300 500 500 500 500 - - 200 200 300 500 500
L)[
L)[
PSMPXFS
L)[
200V 400V 200V 400V 200V 400V
30 100 200 300 500 500 500 - - 30 100 200 200 500 50 50 75 100 100 100 100 - - 50 50 75 100 100 10 25 50 75 100 100 100 - - 10 25 50 75 100
When using the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function with wiring length exceeding 100m, select without frequency search (Pr. 162 = "1, 11"). When the operation panel is installed away from the inverter and when the parameter unit is connected, use a recommended connection cable. For the remote operation using analog signals, keep the control cable distance between the operation signal transmitter and the inverter to 30 m or less. Also, to prevent induction from other devices, keep the wiring away from the power circuits (main circuit and relay sequential circuit). When the frequency setting is performed using the external potentiometer, not using the parameter unit, use a shielded or twisted cable as shown in the figure below. Connect the shield cable to terminal 5, not to the earth (ground).
(3) (2) (1)
Frequency setting Twisted cable potentiometer
10 (10E) 2 5
(3)
Shielded cable
(2)
(1)
Frequency setting potentiometer
10 (10E) 2 5
Earth (ground)
When the inverter is set for the low acoustic noise operation, the leakage current increases compared to in the normal operation due to the high speed switching operation. Always earth (ground) the inverter and the motor. Also, always use the earth (ground) terminal of the inverter for earthing (grounding). (Do not use a case or chassis.)
Electromagnetic interference (EMI)
For the low acoustic noise operation with high carrier frequency, electromagnetic noise tends to increase. Take countermeasures by referring to the following examples. Depending on an installation condition, noise may affect the inverter also in the normal operation (initial status). � Decrease the carrier frequency (Pr.72) setting to lower the
EMI level.
� As measures against AM radio broadcasting noise, radio
noise filter FR-BIF produces an effect.
� As measures against sensor malfunction, line noise filter
FRBSF01, FR-BLF produces an effect.
� For effective reduction of induction noise from the power
cable of the inverter, secure the distance of 30 cm (at least 10
cm) from the power line and use a shielded twisted pair cable
for the signal cable. Do not earth (ground) the shield, and
connect the shield to a common terminal by itself.
EMI measure example
Inverter power supply
Enclosure
Decrease carrier frequency.
EMC filter
FRInverter BLF
Install filter (FR-BLF or FR-BSF01) on inverter output side.
M Motor
Separate inverter and power line by more than 30 cm (at least 10 cm) from sensor circuit.
Use 4-core cable for motor power cable and use one cable as earth (ground) cable.
Use a twisted pair shielded cable.
Control power supply
Do not earth (ground) enclosure directly.
Power supply for
sensor
Sensor
Do not earth (ground) shield but connect it to signal common cable.
Do not earth (ground) control cable.
leakage current
Capacitances exist between the inverter unit I/O cables and other cables or the earth, and within the motor, through which a leakage current flows. Since its value depends on the static capacitances, carrier frequency, etc., low acoustic noise operation at the increased carrier frequency of the inverter will
increase the leakage current. Therefore, take the following countermeasures. Select the earth leakage circuit breaker according to its rated sensitivity current, independently of the carrier frequency setting.
To-earth (ground) leakage currents
Type
Influence and countermeasure
Influence and countermeasure
� Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter own line but also into the other lines through the earthing (grounding) cable, etc. These leakage currents may
operate earth leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays unnecessarily. Countermeasure
� If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting. However, the motor noise increases. Selecting
Pr.240 Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive.
� By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonic and surge suppression in the inverter's own line and other line, operation can be performed with the carrier frequency kept high (with low noise).
Power supply
Transmission path
NV1 Leakage breaker
NV2
Leakage breaker
Inverter
Motor C
C Motor C
116
Line-to-line leakage current
Type
Influence and countermeasure
� Line-to-line leakage current flows through the capacitance
between the inverter/the converter unit output lines.
� Harmonic component of the leaked current may cause
unnecessary operation of an external thermal relay. Long
wiring length (50 m or longer) for the 400V class small
capacity models (7.5 kW or lower) will increase the rate of
leakage current against the rated motor current. In such a
case, an unnecessary operation of the external thermal
relay may be more liable to occur.
Influence and countermeasure
Countermeasure � Use Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. � If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease
the
Pr.72
PWM frequency selection setting.
However, the motor noise increases. Selecting Pr.240
Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound
inoffensive.
To protect motor securely without being subject to the influence of the line-to-line leakage current, direct
detection of the motor temperature using a temperature
sensor is recommended.
Transmission path
Power supply
MCCB
MC
Inverter
Thermal relay
Motor M
Line-to-line leakage currents path
Line-to-line static capacitances
Harmonic Suppression Guidelines
Inverters have a converter section (rectifier circuit) and generate a har-
monic current.
Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point via a
power transformer. The Harmonic Suppression Guidelines was estab-
lished to protect other consumers from these outgoing harmonic cur-
rents.
The three-phase 200 V input specifications 3.7 kW or lower (or single-
phase 200 V input specifications 2.2 kW or lower) were previously cov-
ered by the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Household Appliances
and General-purpose Products and other models were covered by the
Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High
Voltage or Special High Voltage. However, the transistorized inverter has
been excluded from the target products covered by the Harmonic Sup-
pression Guidelines for Household Appliances and General-purpose
Products in January 2004 and the Harmonic Suppression Guideline for
Household Appliances and General-purpose Products was repealed on
September 6, 2004.
All capacity and all models of general-purpose inverter used by specific
consumers are now covered by the "Harmonic Suppression Guidelines
for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage".
� "Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage" This guideline sets the maximum values of outgoing harmonic currents generated from a high-voltage or specially high-voltage receiving consumer who will install, add or renew harmonic generating equipment. If any of the maximum values is exceeded, this guideline requires that consumer to take certain suppression measures.
The users who are not subjected to the above guidelines do not need fol-
low the guidelines, but the users are recommended to connect a DC
reactor and an AC reactor as usual.
Compliance with the "Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Consumers
Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage"
Input power
Target capacity
Countermeasure
Confirm the compliance with the "Harmonic
Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who
Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage"
published in September 1994 by the Ministry of
International Trade and Industry (the present
Japanese Ministry of Economy, Trade and
Industry). Take countermeasures if required. Use
Single-phase
the following materials as reference to calculate
200 V Three-phase
200 V Three-phase
400 V
All capacities
the power supply harmonics. Reference materials "Harmonic Suppression Measures of the General-purpose Inverter"
January 2004, Japan Electrical Manufacturers'
Association
"Calculation Method of Harmonic Current of the
General-purpose Inverter Used by Specific
Consumers"
JEM-TR201 (Revised in December 2003), Japan
Electrical Manufacturers' Association
For compliance to the "Harmonic Suppression Guideline of the General-
purpose Inverter (Input Current of 20A or Less) for Consumers Other
Than Specific Consumers" published by JEMA
Input power
Target capacity
Measures
Single-phase 2.2kW or 200 V lower
Three-phase 3.7 kW or 200 V lower
Connect the AC reactor or DC reactor recommended in the Catalogs and Instruction Manuals. Reference materials "Harmonic Suppression Guideline of the General-purpose Inverter (Input Current of 20A or Less)" JEM-TR226 (Published in December 2003), Japan Electrical Manufacturers' Association
Precaution on Selection and Operation
10
117
Calculation of outgoing harmonic current
Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted from received power voltage) � operation ratio � harmonic content
� Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor � operation time ratio during 30 minutes
� Harmonic content: Found in the table below.
� Harmonic contents (values when the fundamental wave current is
100%)
Reactor 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
Not used
65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8
Three-phase Used (AC side) 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3
bridge (capacitor Used (DC side) 30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
smoothing)
Used (AC, DC sides)
28
9.1 7.2 4.1
3.2
2.4
1.6
1.4
Single-phase Not used
60 33.5 6.1 6.4 2.6 2.7 1.5 1.5
bridge (capacitor
smoothing, fullwave
Used (AC side)
31.9 8.3
3.8
3.0
1.7
1.4
1.0
0.7
rectification)
� Rated capacities and outgoing harmonic currents when driven by
inverter
Fundamental wave current (A)
Outgoing harmonic current converted from 6.6 kV (mA)
(No reactor, 100% operation ratio)
Applied motor (kW) Fundamental wave current converted from 6.6 kV (mA) Rated capacity (kVA)
200 400 VV
5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
10
0.4 1.61 0.81 49 0.57 31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882 0.75 2.74 1.37 83 0.97 53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494 1.5 5.50 2.75 167 1.95 108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006 2.2 7.93 3.96 240 2.81 156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320 3.7 13.0 6.50 394 4.61 257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092 5.5 19.1 9.55 579 6.77 376.1 237.4 49.22 44.58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42 7.5 25.6 12.8 776 9.07 504.4 318.2 65.96 59.75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97 11 36.9 18.5 1121 13.1 728.7 459.6 95.29 86.32 48.20 34.75 29.15 20.18 15 49.8 24.9 1509 17.6 980.9 618.7 128.3 116.2 64.89 46.78 39.24 27.16 18.5 61.4 30.7 1860 21.8 1209 762.6 158.1 143.2 79.98 57.66 48.36 33.48 22 73.1 36.6 2220 25.9 1443 910.2 188.7 170.9 95.46 68.82 57.72 39.96 30 98.0 49.0 2970 34.7 1931 1218 252.5 228.7 127.7 92.07 77.22 53.46
� Conversion factors
Classification
Circuit type
Conversion coefficient Ki
Without reactor
K31 = 3.4
Three-phase bridge With reactor (AC side) K32 = 1.8
3
(Capacitor
smoothing)
With reactor (DC side) K33 = 1.8
With reactors (AC, DC sides)
K34 = 1.4
4
Single-phase bridge (capacitor
Without reactor
K43=2.9
smoothing, full-wave rectification)
With reactor (AC side)
K44=1.3
5
Self-excitation three-phase bridge
When a high power factor converter is used
K5 = 0
Precaution on Selection and Operation
118
Compatible Motors
List of applicable inverter models by rating (motor capacity inverter model)
200 V class
Motor capacity (kW)
DC reactor FR-HEL-[]
0.1
0.4K
0.2
0.4K
0.4
0.4K
0.75
0.75K
1.1
1.5K
1.5
1.5K
2.2
2.2K
3
3.7K
3.7
3.7K
5.5
5.5K
7.5
7.5K
11
11K
15
15K
18.5
18.5K
22
22K
30
30K
LD
ND
ND
Model FR-E820-[]
Rated current (A)
Model FR-E820-[]
Rated current (A)
Model FR-E820S-[]
0.1K 0008 1.3
0.1K 0008 0.8
0.1K
0008
0.1K 0008 1.3
0.2K 0015 1.5
0.2K
0015
0.2K 0015 2
0.4K 0030 3
0.4K
0030
0.4K 0030 3.5
0.75K 0050 5
0.75K 0050
0.75K 0050 6
1.5K 0080 8
1.5K
0080
1.5K 0080 9.6
1.5K 0080 8
1.5K
0080
1.5K 0080 9.6
2.2K 0110 11
2.2K
0110
2.2K 0110 12
3.7K 0175 17.5
-
-
3.7K 0175 19.6
3.7K 0175 17.5
-
-
3.7K 0175 19.6
5.5K 0240 24
-
-
5.5K 0240 30
7.5K 0330 33
-
-
7.5K 0330 40
11K
0470 47
-
-
11K
0470 56
15K
0600 60
-
-
15K
0600 69
18.5K 0760 76
-
-
18.5K 0760 88
22K
0900 90
-
-
22K
0900 115
-
-
-
-
-
Rated current (A) 0.8 1.5 3 5 8 8 11 -
400 V class
Motor capacity (kW)
DC reactor FR-HEL-[]
0.4
H0.4K
0.75
H0.75K
1.5
H1.5K
2.2
H2.2K
3
H3.7K
3.7
H3.7K
5.5
H5.5K
7.5
H7.5K
11
H11K
15
H15K
18.5
H18.5K
22
H22K
30
H30K
LD
ND
Model FR-E840-[]
Rated current (A)
Model FR-E840-[]
Rated current (A)
0.4K 0016 2.1
0.4K 0016 1.6
0.4K 0016 2.1
0.75K 0026 2.6
0.75K 0026 3.5
1.5K 0040 4
1.5K 0040 5.5
2.2K 0060 6
2.2K 0060 6.9
3.7K 0095 9.5
3.7K 0095 11.1
3.7K 0095 9.5
3.7K 0095 11.1
5.5K 0120 12
5.5K 0120 17.5
7.5K 0170 17
7.5K 0170 23
11K
0230 23
11K
0230 35
15K
0300 30
15K
0300 41
18.5K 0380 38
18.5K 0380 45
22K
0440 44
22K
0440 60
-
-
-
11
Compatible Motors
The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor. To drive a Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor, use the 200 V class 0.75K inverter for a 1.1 kW motor, or 200/400 V class 2.2K inverter for a 3 kW motor.
The power factor may be slightly lower.
Overload current rating
LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C
ND 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C
119
11
Application to constant-torque motors Standard specifications (indoor type)
SF-HRCA type
� Continuous operation even at low speed of 0.3 Hz is possible (when using Real sensorless vector control). The load torque is not needed to be reduced even at a low speed and constant torque (100% torque) continuous operation is possible within the range of speed ratio 1/20 (3 to 60 Hz) (except for the 22K model). (The characteristic of motor running at 60 Hz or higher is that output torque is constant.)
� Installation size is the same as that of the standard motor. � Note that operation characteristic in the chart below cannot be
obtained if V/F control is used.
Output Number of Frequency
(kW)
poles
range
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3 to 120 Hz
3.7
5.5 7.5
4
11
15
18.5
3 to 100 Hz
22
30
Common specification
Base frequency 60 Hz � Rotation direction (CCW)
Counterclockwise when viewed from the motor end � Lead wire 3.7 kW or lower: 3 wires 5.5 kW or higher: 6 or 12 wires � Surrounding air temperature: 40C or lower The protective structure is IP44.
Motor torque
The following shows torque characteristics of the motor in combination with the inverter with the ND rating. The overload capacity decreases for the LD rating. Observe the specified range of the inverter.
Continuous rated range of use (Real sensorless vector control)
60 Hz torque reference (when the inverter is 0.4 kW to 7.5 kW)
60 Hz torque reference (when the inverter is 11 kW to 22 kW)
Maximum torque for short time (0.4 kW to 3.7 kW) 200
Output torque Output torque
150
100 95
70
(%)
(60) 63
(50)
50
(45)
45
(40)
Maximum torque for short time (5.5 kW to 7.5 kW)
Continuous operation torque (0.4 kW to 2.2 kW, 5.5 kW, 7.5 kW)
Continuous operation torque (3.7 kW)
220 V
200 V
0 0.3 3
60
120
Output frequency (Hz)
Values in parenthesis apply to the 0.4 kW to 0.75 kW
Maximum torque for short time
150
Continuous operation torque (15 kW, 18.5 kW) 100
95 85 80
220 V 200 V
60
(%) 57
(51)
0 0.3 3
Continuous operation torque (22 kW) Continuous operation torque (11 kW)
10
60
100
Output frequency (Hz)
Values in parenthesis apply to the 22 kW
The maximum short-time torque indicates the maximum torque characteristics within 60 s. For the motor constant under Real sensorless vector control, please contact your sales representative.
Compatible Motors
120
Application to vector control dedicated motors (SF-V5RU)
For performing vector control, the FR-A8AP E kit (vector control compatible option) is required. A 12 V or 24 V power supply is required as the power supply for the encoder of the SF-V5RU.
Motor torque
When the vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU) and inverter are used, the torque characteristics are as shown below. It is assumed that the motor is used in combination with an inverter with the ND rating. The overload capacity decreases when the LD rating is selected. Observe the specified range of the inverter.
� SF-V5RU
Rated speed of 1500 r/min series <1.5 to 18.5 (kW)>
Maximum torque for short time 150
Output torque
Continuous operation torque 100
75
Constant power
(%) 50
0
1500
3000
Speed (r/min)
� The SF-V5RU-3.7kW or lower can be operated with the maximum rotation speed of 3600 r/min. For the use of those motors, please contact your sales representative.
� The maximum rotation speed of motors with a brake is 1800 r/min.
Motor model
SF-V5RU F H 5K B
Symbol Structure Symbol Structure
Symbol Output (kW) Symbol Output (kW)
Symbol Electromagnetic brake
None Horizontal type
F
Flange type
None H
200 V class 400 V class
1K
1.5
7K
7.5
2K
2.2
11K
11
3K
3.7
15K
15
5K
5.5
18K
18.5
None B
Without With
Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure. (This device should be arranged at the customer side.)
Model lineup (: Available model, -: Not available)
� Rated speed: 1500 r/min (4 poles)
Model
Standard horizontal type Flange type Standard horizontal type with brake Flange type with brake
Standard Rated output (kW)
type
Frame number
SF-V5RU(H)[]
SF-V5RUF(H)[]
SF-V5RU(H)[]B
SF-V5RUF(H)[]B
1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M
-
11
Compatible Motors
121
11
Compatible Motors
Motor specifications
� 200 V class (Mitsubishi Electric dedicated motor [SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series)])
Motor type SF-V5RU[ ]K
1
2
3
5
7
11
15
18
Applicable inverter model FR-E820-[ ]K (ND rating)
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
Rated output (kW)
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
Rated current (A)
� Rated torque (N m)
8.5
11.5
17.6
28.5
37.5
54
72.8
88
9.55
14.1
23.6
35.0
47.7
70.0
95.5
118
� Maximum torque 150% 60 s (N m)
14.3
21.1
35.4
52.4
71.6
105
143
176
Rated speed (r/min)
Maximum speed (r/min)
Frame No.
� Inertia moment J (10-4 kg m2)
1500 3000 90L
67.5
100L 105
112M 175
132S 275
132M 400
160M 750
160L 875
180M 1725
Noise
75 dB or less
Cooling fan (with thermal protector)
Voltage
Input Recommended thermal setting
Single-phase 200 V/50 Hz
Single-phase 200 V to 230 V/60 Hz
36/55 W
22/28 W
(0.26/0.32 A)
(0.11/0.13 A)
0.36 A
0.18 A
Three-phase 200 V/50 Hz Three-phase 200 to 230 V/60 Hz 55/71 W (0.39/0.39 A)
0.51 A
Surrounding air temperature, humidity -10 to +40�C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Structure (Protective structure)
Totally enclosed forced draft system (Motor: IP44, cooling fan: IP23S)
Detector
Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase +12 V/24 VDC power supply
Equipment
Encoder, thermal protector, fan
Heat resistance class
F
Vibration rank
V10
Approx. mass (kg)
24
33
41
52
62
99
113
138
� 400 V class (Mitsubishi Electric dedicated motor [SF-V5RUH (1500 r/min series)])
Motor type SF-V5RUH[ ]K
Applicable inverter model FR-E840-[ ]K (ND rating)
Rated output (kW)
Rated current (A)
� Rated torque (N m)
1
2
3
5
7
11
15
18
2.2
2.2
3.7
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
4.2
5.8
8.8
14.5
18.5
27.5
35.5
44
9.55
14.1
23.6
35.0
47.7
70.0
95.5
118
� Maximum torque 150% 60 s (N m)
14.3
21.1
35.4
52.4
71.6
105
143
176
Rated speed (r/min)
Maximum speed (r/min)
Frame No.
� Inertia moment J (10-4 kg m2)
1500 3000 90L
67.5
100L 105
112M 175
132S 275
132M 400
160M 750
160L 875
180M 1725
Noise
75 dB or less
Cooling fan (with thermal protector)
Voltage
Input Recommended thermal setting
Single-phase 200 V/50 Hz
Single-phase 200 V to 230 V/60 Hz
36/55 W
22/28 W
(0.26/0.32 A)
(0.11/0.13 A)
0.36 A
0.18 A
Three-phase 380 to 400 V/50 Hz Three-phase 400 to 460 V/60 Hz 55/71 W (0.19/0.19 A)
0.25 A
Surrounding air temperature, humidity -10 to +40�C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Structure (Protective structure)
Totally enclosed forced draft system (Motor: IP44, cooling fan: IP23S)
Detector
Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase +12 V/24 VDC power supply
Equipment
Encoder, thermal protector, fan
Heat resistance class
F
Vibration rank
V10
Approx. mass (kg)
24
33
41
52
62
99
113
138
A dedicated motor of 3.7 kW or less can be run at the maximum speed of 3600 r/min. Consult our sales office when using the motor at the maximum speed. Power (current) at 50 Hz/60 Hz. Since a motor with brake has a window for gap check, the protective structure of both the cooling fan section and brake section is IP20. S of IP23S is an additional code
indicating the condition that protection from water intrusion is established only when a cooling fan is not operating. The value when high carrier frequency is set (Pr.72 = 6, Pr.240 = 0). The 12 V/24 V power supply is required as the power supply for the encoder. (When the FR-A8TP is used, the 24 V power supply of the FR-A8TP can be used for the
encoder of the SF-V5RU.) The cooling fan is equipped with a thermal protector. The cooling fan stops when the coil temperature exceeds the specified value in order to protect the fan motor. A
restrained cooling fan or degraded fan motor insulation could be causes for the rise in coil temperature. The cooling fan re-starts when the coil temperature drops to normal. The cooling fan voltage and input values are the basic specifications of the cooling fan alone and free air values. The input value becomes slightly larger when it is rotated by this motor due to an increased workload, but the cooling fan can be used as it is. When preparing a thermal relay at the user side, use the recommended thermal setting.
122
Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (standard horizontal type)
Frame Number 90L
Suction
Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P
L
R
A
B
50
KA
40
Exhaust
A
KL D
Frame Number 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M
Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P
Suction
L
A KA
Exhaust
R
B
Q
QK
A
KL D
I
H
T U
9 KP
KG 4
C H
Direction of cooling fan wind
Mark for earthing (grounding)
W
S Section AA
A
FF N
27 XB
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
Sliding distance 15
Frame leg viewed from above
EE M
Direction of
cooling fan wind
FF
Mark for earthing (grounding)
N
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
For cooling fan (A, B) For motor (U, V, W) Thermal protector (G1, G2)
AB
U V W G1 G2
T
A 27
XB W
S Section AA
U
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M4)
40
E
E
M ML
Sliding distance 4
12
Frame leg viewed from above
KG
6.5
C
Frame Number 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L
Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P
Suction
L
A KA
Exhaust
R
B
110
90
With guard
A
wires
Direction of cooling fan wind
Mark for earthing (grounding)
Earth (ground) terminal (M8)
W
A
XB
F
F
N
Sliding distance 4
KL D
56
50
E
E
M
For motor (U, V, W)
T U
14.5 KG 8 C H I
S Section AA
Frame leg viewed from above
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M8)
11
Compatible Motors
For cooling fan (A, B, C)
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the frame installation foot as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
� Dimensions table
(Unit: mm)
SF- Frame Mass
Motor
Terminal screw size
V5RU[]K No. (kg) A
BCD
E
F
H
I
KA
KG
KL (KP)
L
M ML N XB Q QK
R
S
T
U
W
U,V, A,B, G1, W (C) G2
1
90L 24 256.5 114 90 183.6 70
62.5 198
--
53
65
220 (210)
425
175
--
150 56 --
--
168.5 24j6 7
4
8
M6 M4 M4
2 100L 33 284 128 100 207 80 70 203.5 230 65 78 231 477 200 212 180 63 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
3 112M 41 278 135 112 228 95 70 226 253 69 93 242 478 230 242 180 70 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
5 132S 52 303 152 132 266 108 70 265 288 75 117 256 542 256 268 180 89 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
7 132M 62 322 171 132 266 108 89 265 288 94 117 256 580 256 268 218 89 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
11 160M 99 412 198 160 318 127 105 316 367 105 115 330 735 310 -- 254 108 -- -- 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
15 160L 113 434 220 160 318 127 127 316 367 127 115 330 779 310 -- 298 108 -- -- 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
18 180M 138 438.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 359 410 127 139 352 790 335 -- 285 121 -- -- 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4
(a) Install the motor with a frame number 180 or larger on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal. (b) Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from the opposite load side to
the load side.
(c)
The vertical tolerance for the shaft center height is
0 -0.5
.
(d) The 400 V class motor has "H" in its model name.
123
Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (standard horizontal type with brake)
Frame Number 90L
Frame Number 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M
T U
Z KG 22 G C KP
Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
Suction
L
A
R
KA B
50
Exhaust Main 40 terminal box
1 A
2
Direction of
Mark for earthing
cooling fan wind (grounding)
FF N
W
Sliding distance
X
A
XB
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
S Section AA
Frame leg viewed from above
KL D
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
Suction
L
A
R
KA B
Q
Exhaust Main QK terminal box
1 A
1
27
2
EE
M
2
Direction of cooling fan wind
Mark for earthing (grounding)
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
FF N
Main terminal box For brake (B1, B2)
Terminal box for cooling fan
For motor (U, V, W)
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
For cooling fan (A, B)
A XB
W
S
Section AA
B1 B2 U V W G1 G2
ABC
T U
Z
KG 22
G C
H KP
KL D
1
2
27 J EE M ML
Sliding distance
X
Frame leg viewed from above
11
Compatible Motors
Frame Number 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L
Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P
Suction
Terminal box for cooling fan
L
A
R
KA
B
110
Main
90
Exhaust terminal box
1, 2
A
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M4)
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M4)
KL D
1
2
T U
Z KG 22 G C H KP
Direction of cooling fan wind
Mark for earthing (grounding)
Earth (ground) terminal (M8)
W
S
Section AA
A
F F XB N
56
J EE M
Sliding distance
X
Main terminal box
Terminal box for cooling fan For motor (U, V, W)
Frame leg viewed from above
U
V
W
B1 B2 G1 G2
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M8)
For cooling fan (A, B, C)
ABC
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M4)
For brake (B1, B2)
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual opening.
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the frame installation foot as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
� Dimensions table
(Unit: mm)
Terminal
SFV5RU[]
KB
Frame No.
Mass (kg)
A
BC D
E
Motor
Shaft end
screw size
F G H I J KA KD KG KL KP L M ML N X XB Z Q QK R
S
T
U
W
U, V, W
A, B, (C)
G1, G2
B1, B2
1 90L 29 296.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 4 -- -- -- 53 27 65 220 245 465 175 -- 150 15 56 9 50 40 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
2 100L 46 333.5 128 100 207 80 70 6.5 -- -- 40 65 27 78 231 265 526.5 200 212 180 4 63 12 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
3 112M 53 355 135 112 228 95 70 6.5 -- -- 40 69 27 93 242 290 555 230 242 180 4 70 12 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
5 132S 70 416 152 132 266 108 70 6.5 -- -- 40 75 27 117 256 329 655 256 268 180 4 89 12 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
7 132M 80 435 171 132 266 108 89 6.5 -- -- 40 94 27 117 256 329 693 256 268 218 4 89 12 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
11 160M 140 522.5 198 160 318 127 105 8 -- -- 50 105 56 115 330 391 845.5 310 -- 254 4 108 14.5 110 90 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
15 160L 155 544.5 220 160 318 127 127 8 -- -- 50 127 56 115 330 391 889.5 310 -- 298 4 108 14.5 110 90 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
18 180M 185 568.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 8 -- -- 50 127 56 139 352 428 920 335 -- 285 4 121 14.5 110 90 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4 M4
(a) Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal.
(b) Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from the opposite load side to
the load side.
(c)
The vertical tolerance for the shaft center height is
0 -0.5
.
(d) The 400 V class motor has "H" in its model name.
(e) Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure.
124
D T
LB U
LC IE
Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (flange type)
Frame Number 90L
Frame Number 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
LL
KB
Exhaust LG
LR LE Q
QK
Suction
Section AA
B
KL LN LZ
A
LA
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P LL
Suction
KB
LR Q
Exhaust
LG LE
QK
KL
Section AA
LC
LB
D
Direction of cooling fan wind
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) Mark for earthing (grounding)
T
U
B KD
W
S
Section BB
A
Direction of cooling fan wind
For cooling fan (A, B) For motor (U, V, W)
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) Mark for earthing (grounding)
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
B B
KD W
S
Section BB
AB
U V W G1 G2
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M4)
LN LZ
LA A
A
Frame Number 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
LL
KB
LR
Suction
LG LE Exhaust Section
AA
B
B
D
Direction of cooling fan wind
With guard wires
Earth (ground) terminal (M8) Mark for earthing (grounding)
Q
QK
KL
A
KD A W
T U
S Section BB
LB LC
LA IE
LN LZ
For motor (U, V, W)
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M8)
11
Compatible Motors
For cooling fan (A, B, C)
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
� Dimensions table
SFV5RU F[]K
Flange Frame Mass No. No. (kg)
D
Motor
Shaft end
(Unit: mm)
Terminal screw size
IE KB KD KL LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W U,V,W A,B,(C) G1,G2
1 FF165 90L 26.5 183.6 -- 198.5 27 220 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 402 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6
M4
M4
2 FF215 100L 37 207 130 213 27 231 215 180j6 250 4 16 432 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6
M4
M4
3 FF215 112M 46 228 141 239 27 242 215 180j6 250 4 16 448 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6
M4
M4
5 FF265 132S 65 266 156 256 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 484 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6
M4
M4
7 FF265 132M 70 266 156 294 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 522 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6
M4
M4
11 FF300 160M 110 318 207 318 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 625 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8
M4
M4
15 FF300 160L 125 318 207 362 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 669 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8
M4
M4
18 FF350 180M 160 363 230 378.5 56 352 350 300j6 400 5 20 690 4 18.5 110 110 90 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8
M4
M4
(a) The motor with a frame number 180 cannot be installed on the ceiling (with the shaft facing up). For use with the shaft facing down, the protection rating of the cooling fan is IP20.
(b) Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from the opposite load side to the load side.
(c) The 400 V class motor has "H" in its model name.
125
KP
Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (flange type with brake)
Frame Number 90L
Frame Number 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
Terminal box for cooling fan
Connector (for encoder) Terminal box for cooling fan MS3102A20-29P
D T
U LB LC 22 KP D
Suction
LL
KB
LR
LG LE
Exhaust Main
Q
terminal box
QK
Section
AA 1
B
B 2
Direction of
cooling fan wind
W
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
Mark for earthing (grounding)
KL
KD 2
LN LZ 1
A
LA A
Suction 1
LL
KB
LR
Exhaust LG
LE
Q
Main terminal box
QK
Section
AA
B
KL A
LC
LB
2
Direction of cooling fan wind
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) Mark for earthing (grounding)
T
B KD
W
U
S Section BB
Main terminal box
For brake (B1, B2)
Terminal box for cooling fan
For motor (U, V, W)
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
For cooling fan (A, B)
S Section BB
22
1 LN LZ
2 LA A
B1 B2 U V W G1 G2
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M4)
ABC
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M4)
11
Compatible Motors
Frame Number 160M, 160L
Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
LL
KB
LR
Suction
Main LG
LE Q
Exhaust
terminal box Section
QK
AA
1, 2 B
KL 1
A
LB LC
D
B
KD A
Direction of cooling fan wind
Earth (ground) terminal (M8) Mark for earthing (grounding)
Main terminal box
Terminal box for cooling fan For motor (U, V, W)
For cooling fan (A, B, C)
22 LA KP
T U
LN LZ 2
W S
Section BB
U
V
W
B1 B2 G1 G2
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M8)
ABC
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M4)
For brake (B1, B2)
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual opening.
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
� Dimensions table
SF-V5RU Flange Frame Mass F[]KB No. No. (kg) D
(Unit: mm)
Motor
Shaft end
Terminal screw size
KB KD KL KP LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S
T
U
W
U,V, W
A,B, (C)
B1, B2
G1, G2
1 FF165 90L 31.5 183.6 198.5 27 220 155 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 442 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
2 FF215 100L 50 207 213 27 231 165 215 180j6 250 4 16 481.5 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
3 FF215 112M 58 228 239 27 242 178 215 180j6 250 4 16 525 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
5 FF265 132S 83 266 256 27 256 197 265 230j6 300 4 20 597 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
7 FF265 132M 88 266 294 27 256 197 265 230j6 300 4 20 635 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
11 FF300 160M 151 318 318 56 330 231 300 250j6 350 5 20 735.5 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
15 FF300 160L 167 318 362 56 330 231 300 250j6 350 5 20 779.5 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
(a) Install the motor on the wall and use it with the shaft horizontal. (b) Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from the opposite load side to
the load side. (c) The 400 V class motor has "H" in its model name. (d) Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure.
126
Specification comparison between PM sensorless vector control and induction motor control
Item
PM sensorless vector control
Induction motor control
Applicable motor
IPM motor,SPM motor
Induction motor
200% FR-E820-0175(3.7K) or lower, FR-E840-0095(3.7K) or
lower, FR-E860-0061(3.7K) or lower, FR-E820S-0110(2.2K) or
Starting torque
50%
lower) and 150% (FR-E820-0240(5.5K) or higher, FR-E840-0120(5.5K) or
higher, FR-E860-0090(5.5K) or higher)
under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control
Startup delay
Startup delay of about 0.1 s for magnetic pole position detection.
No startup delay (when online auto tuning is not performed at startup).
Driving by the commercial power supply
Cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.
Can be driven by the commercial power supply. (Other than vector control dedicated motor.)
Operation during coasting
While the motor is coasting, potential is generated across motor terminals.
While the motor is coasting, potential is not generated across motor terminals.
Torque control
Not available
Real sensorless vector control or Vector control
For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (Note that the motor rated current should be 0.4 kW or higher (0.1 kW or higher for the 200 V class).) If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
Available when a Vector control compatible option is installed.
NOTE
� Before wiring, make sure that the motor is stopped. Otherwise an electric shock may occur. � Never connect an IPM motor to the commercial power supply. � No slippage occurs with an IPM motor because of its characteristic. If an IPM motor, which took over an induction motor, is driven at the same
speed as for the induction motor, the running speed of the IPM motor becomes faster by the amount of the induction motor's slippage. Adjust the speed command to run the IPM motor at the same speed as the induction motor, as required.
11
Compatible Motors
127
11
Compatible Motors
Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400 V class motor insulation
When driving a 400 V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor. When the 400 V class motor is driven by the inverter, consider the following countermeasures:
With induction motor
It is recommended to take one of the following countermeasures:
Rectifying the motor insulation and limiting the PWM carrier frequency according to the wiring length
For the 400 V class motor, use an insulation-enhanced motor.
Specifically,
� Order a "400 V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor". � For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use an "inverter-driven dedicated motor". � Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection as indicated below according to the wiring length.
Wiring length
Wiring length
Wiring length
50 m or shorter
50 m to 100 m Longer than 100 m
14.5 kHz or lower
8 kHz or lower
2 kHz lower
Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side
� Connect a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) at the output side of the inverter.
With PM motor
Use the wiring length of 100 m or shorter when connecting a PM motor.
Use one PM motor for one inverter. Multiple PM motors cannot be connected to an inverter.
When the wiring length exceeds 50 m for a 400 V class motor driven by an inverter under PM sensorless vector control, set "9" (6 kHz) or less in Pr.72
PWM frequency selection.
NOTE
� A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) can be used under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control.
Application to special motors
Motors with brake
Use the motor with brake having independent power supply for the brake, connect the brake power supply to the inverter primary side power and make the inverter output off using the output stop terminal (MRS) when the brake is applied (motor stop). Rattle may be heard according to the type of the brake in the low speed region but it is not a fault.
Pole changing motor
As this motor differs in rated current from the standard motor, confirm the maximum current of the motor and select the inverter. Be sure to change the number of poles after the motor has stopped. If the number of poles is changed during rotation, the regenerative overvoltage protection circuit may be activated to cause an inverter alarm, coasting the motor to a stop.
Submersible motor
Since the motor rated current is larger than that of the standard motor, make selection of the inverter capacity carefully. In addition, the wiring distance between the motor and inverter may become longer, refer to page 110 to perform wiring with a cable thick enough. Leakage current may flow more than the land motor, take care when selecting the earth leakage current breaker.
Explosion-proof motor
To drive an explosion-proof type motor, an explosion-proof test of the motor and inverter together is necessary. The test is also necessary when driving an existing explosion-proof motor. The inverter is a non-explosion proof structure, install it in a safety location.
Geared motor
The continuous operating rotation range of this motor changes depending on the lubrication system and maker. Especially in the case of oil lubrication, continuous operation in the low-speed range only can cause gear seizure. For fast operation at higher than 60 Hz, please consult the motor maker.
Synchronous motor other than PM motor
This motor is not suitable for applications of large load variation or impact, where out-of-sync is likely to occur. Please contact your sales representative when using this motor because its starting current and rated current are greater than those of the standard motor and will not rotate stably at low speed.
Single-phase motor
The Single-phase motor is not suitable for variable operation by the inverter. For the capacitor starting system, the capacitor may be damaged due to harmonic current flowing to the capacitor. For the split-phase starting system and repulsion starting system, not only output torque is not generated at low speed but it will result in starting coil burnout due to failure of centrifugal force switch inside. Replace with a three-phase motor for use.
128
Compatibility
Major differences from the FR-E700 series
Item
FR-E800
FR-E700
Compatible
The product width and height are different between the FR-E800 and FR-E700 inverters for some capacity
Outline dimensions
models. � 3-phase 200 V-3.7K: Changed from 170 mm to 140 mm
� 3-phase 400 V to 0.4K to 1.5K: Changed from 140 mm to 108 mm
� Single-phase 200 V-2.2K: Changed from 150 mm to 128 mm
Compatible
The product width and height are different between the FR-E800 and FR-E700 inverters for some capacity
Installation dimensions
models. (Installation interchange attachments are available.) � 3-phase 200 V-3.7K: Changed from 158 mm to 128 mm
� 3-phase 400 V-0.4K to 1.5K: Changed from 128 mm to 96 mm
� Single-phase 200 V-2.2K: Changed from 138 mm to 118 mm
Multiple rating
Two ratings (LD/ND) ND rating only for the single-phase 200 V class.
N/A (ND rating only)
ND rating
150% 60 s, 200% 3 s at surrounding air temperature of 50�C
Permissible load
LD rating
120% 60 s, 150% 3 s at surrounding air temperature of 50�C
N/A
Built-in brake transistor
200 V class: 0.4K to 22K 400 V class: 0.4K to 22K 575 V class: 0.75K to 7.5K
200 V class: 0.4K to 15K 400 V class: 0.4K to 15K
--
Soft-PWM control / High carrier frequency PWM
V/F control
Available
Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Available
Control method
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
Not available
Real sensorless vector control
Available
Available Not available
Vector control
Available (The FR-A8AP E kit plug-in option is required.)
Not available
PM sensorless vector control
Available
Not available
Speed control
Available
Control mode
Torque control Position control
Available
Available (The FR-A8AP E kit plug-in option is required.)
Not available Not available
Output frequency
0.2 to 590 Hz (under V/F control) 0.2 to 400 Hz (under other than V/F control)
0.2 to 400 Hz
Frequency setting resolution
Terminal 2
0.015 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 10 V / 12 bits) 0.03 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 5 V / 11 bits) 0.03 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 20 mA / 11 bits)
0.015 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 10 V / 12 bits)
0.06 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 10 V / 10 bits) 0.12 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 5 V / 9 bits)
0.06 Hz / 60 Hz (0 to 10 V / 10 bits)
Terminal 4
0.03 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 5 V / 11 bits)
0.12 Hz / 60 Hz (0 to 5 V / 9 bits)
0.03 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 20 mA / 11 bits)
0.06 Hz / 60 Hz (0 to 20 mA / 10 bits)
Major additional functions
� Signals added for additional control methods/modes
(e.g. MC signal for control mode switching)
Terminal function
� Signals added for the trace function
-
(e.g. Trace trigger input (TRG) signal)
� Signals added for the PLC function
Input signal
(Sequence start (SQ) signal) FR-E800/FR-E800-E:
Safety stop signal
Safety stop input (S1) Safety stop input (S2) Safety stop input common (PC) FR-E800-SCE: SX1, SX2, SY1, SY2, SC1, SC2
Safety stop function model only. Safety stop input (S1) Safety stop input (S2) Safety stop input common (PC)
(for functional safety)
Major additional functions
Traverse, multi-rating, PLC function, pre-excitation,
Operational functions
torque limit, trace function, load fault detection,
-
Ethernet communication (incl. CC-Link IE TSN,
EtherNet/IP), and others
Major additional functions
� Signals added for additional control methods/modes
(e.g. Home position return completed (ZP) signal)
Terminal function
� Signals added for the load fault detection function -
(e.g. Upper limit warning detection (LUP) signal)
� Virtual output terminals for communication (NET Y1
to Y4)
Specification of terminal FM 1440 pulses/s at full scale
AM: 0 to +10 V
Output signal Specification of terminal AM -10 to +10 V / 12 bits
(Provided only for inverters other than Japanese specification)
Output signal (for terminal FM /
terminal AM)
Major additional functions
� Signals added for additional control methods/modes (e.g. position command, torque monitor)
-
� PID measured value 2
Major additional functions
Output signal (for communication)
� Signals added for BACnet communication (e.g. signal for BACnet reception status)
� Communication station number
-
(PU port, CC-Link)
Compatibility
12
129
12
Compatibility
Item
Output signal
Safety stop function
Protective/ warning output
Protective function Warning function
Operation panel
Standard
Optional
Main circuit terminals
Shape of terminal block
Control circuit terminal
Contact input
Analog input Relay output Open collector output. Pulse output Analog output
Safety I/O signal
Ethernet
Communication
Safety communication
RS-485 USB
Plug-in option
Surrounding air temperature Storage temperature
FR-E800
FR-E700
FR-E800/FR-E800-E:
� Safety monitor output (SO)
� Safety stop input/output common (SOC)
� The following signals can be assigned to output
terminals.
The following signals can be assigned to output
SAFE signal (used to monitor safety stop status) terminals.
SAFE2 signal (output when a fault is detected)
SAFE signal (used to monitor safety stop status)
FR-E800-SCE:
SAFE2 signal (output when a fault is detected)
� Terminals are not used. (Safety communication
supported)
(Safety stop function model only.)
� The following signals can be assigned to virtual
output terminals for communication.
SAFE signal (used to monitor safety stop status)
SAFE2 signal (output when a fault is detected)
Major additional functions
Upper limit fault detection (E.LUP), excessive position -
fault (E.OD), and others
Major additional functions
Stroke limit warning (LP), Duplicate IP address (DIP), IP address fault (IP), Incorrect parameter setting (SE),
-
and others
Operation panel equipped as standard (not removable). Four-digit display using a 7-segment LED is employed.
Enclosure surface operation panel (FR-PA07) Parameter unit (FR-PU07(BB)) LCD operation panel (FR-LU08)
Enclosure surface operation panel (FR-PA07) Parameter unit (FR-PU07(BB))
R, S, T, U, V, W, P, PR, N, P1, earth (ground) (screw terminal type)
Standard control circuit terminal model:
Spring clamp type
Screw type Safety stop function model:
Spring clamp type
FR-E800: 7 terminals FR-E800-E: 2 terminals FR-E800-SCE: 0 terminals
Standard control circuit terminal model: 7 terminals Safety stop function model: 6 terminals
FR-E800 / FR-E800-E: 2 terminals FR-E800-SCE: 0 terminals
2 terminals
FR-E800 / FR-E800-E / FR-E800-SCE: 1 terminal 1 terminal
FR-E800: 2 terminals
FR-E800-E: 0 terminals
2 terminals
FR-E800-SCE: 0 terminals
1 terminal (FM type only)
1 terminal
1 terminal (AM type only)
N/A
FR-E800/FR-E800-E:
S1, S2, SIC, SO, SOC
S1, S2, PC
FR-E800-SCE:
(Safety stop function model only.)
SX1, SX2, SY1, SY2, SC1, SC2
FR-E800:
FR-E700-NE:
N/A
Available, one port
FR-E800-E/FR-E800-SCE:
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic,
Available, two ports
MODBUS/TCP
CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic,
Other than the above:
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, MODBUS/TCP, BACnet/IP N/A
FR-E800/FR-E800-E:
N/A
FR-E800-SCE only:
N/A
CC-Link IE TSN Safety communication function,
CIPsafety, PROFIsafe
FR-E800:
one port, Mitsubishi inverter protocol, MODBUS RTU
FR-E800-E/FR-E800-SCE:
N/A
Available, mini B connector, USB bus power available Available, mini B connector, USB bus power
(Maximum SCCR: 500 mA)
unavailable
FR-A8AX E kit, FR-A8AY E kit, FR-A8AR E kit,
FR-A8NC E kit, FR-A8NP E kit, FR-A8ND E kit, FR-A8AP E kit The option is connected to the inverter for earthing
FR-A7AX E kit, FR-A7AY E kit, FR-A7AR E kit, FR-A7NC E kit, FR-A7NP E kit, FR-A7ND E kit
(grounding) through the earth plate of the inverter.
200/400 V class:
-20�C to +60�C (Derate the rated current when using
the inverter in a temperature exceeding 50�C.) 575 V class:
-10�C to +50�C
-10�C to +60�C (Derate the rated current when using
the inverter in a temperature exceeding 50�C.)
-40�C to +70�C
-20�C to +65�C
Installation precautions
� Removal procedure of the front cover is different. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection).) � Plug-in options of the FR-A700 series are not compatible.
Wiring precautions
� When the FR-E700 standard control circuit terminal model is replaced, the terminal block type is changed from the screw type to the spring clamp type. Use of blade terminals is recommended. When our authorized crimp terminals are used for the FR-E700 inverters, they cannot be used for the FR-E800 series inverters since they are not compatible with the spring clamp terminal block. (Some crimp terminals may not be used for the FR-E800 series inverters due to differences in size.) For details, refer to the Information for Replacement of FR-E700 Series with FR-E800 Series (BCN-C21002-214).
� To use the PU connector, note that wiring methods are different. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection).)
130
Comparison with the FR-E700 series in functions
Parameter/function Base frequency or other functions related to output
frequency
Differences with the FR-E700 Addition Modification Deletion Related parameter
Pr.3 and others
MRS input selection
Pr.17
Stall prevention operation level and related functions
Operation panel main monitor
selection, TM terminal function
selection, and related functions
Frequency / rotation speed Unit switchover
Restart coasting time and others
Pr.22, Pr.150, Pr.165 Pr.52, Pr.54, and others Pr.53 Pr.57, Pr.165
Remarks
Maximum setting was changed from 400 Hz to 590 Hz. Max. 400 Hz when the control method is not V/F control. Addition of normally closed (NC contact) input specification for terminal X10 Multiple ratings LD: 120% ND: 150%
Addition of monitor items (e.g. running speed)
Change of the setting range
Remote function selection
Retry waiting time
Special regenerative brake duty
Applied motor
Motor capacity, number of motor poles, and the like
Online auto tuning selection
Built-in potentiometer switching
Output current detection operation selection
I/O terminal function selection and related functions
NET output selection
Display corrosion level (Control circuit board Corrosion-Attack-
Level Alert System)
PWM frequency automatic switchover
Brake opening current
Speed deviation excess detection frequency
Inverter output terminal filter
Monitor negative output selection
Overspeed detection level
Initial communication delay time,
heartbeat settings
PLC function
Extension output terminal filter
Gateway address
Digital torque command
Second motor control
Speed setting reference
Display estimated main circuit capacitor residual life
Display ABC relay contact life
Display power cycle life
PID signal operation selection
Second frequency search gain
Multiple rating setting
PID output suspension function
Traverse function
PID set point and related settings
Inverter output fault detection enable/disable selection
Brake opening current selection
Pr.59 Pr.68
Remote setting enabled for deceleration to the frequency to the set frequency or lower
� Change of the retry waiting time � Change of the operation to be performed when a fault
that does not trigger a retry occurs during retry waiting time
Pr.70
Change of the setting range for the brake duty
Addition of motors:
� Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving
motor SF-PR series
Pr.71
� Mitsubishi Electric geared motor GM series � Mitsubishi Electric Vector control dedicated motor
SF-V5RU series
� Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving
motor with encoder SF-PR-SC series
Pr.80, Pr.81, and others
Addition of 11 to 30 kW motors. 12 motor poles are supported.
Pr.95
Pr.146
Pr.166, Pr.167
Pr.178 to Pr.192 Pr.193 to Pr.196
Addition of input/output signals
Pr.198
Pr.260
Pr.279
The setting range is extended to 400%.
Pr.285
Pr.289
The terminal response can be adjusted.
Pr.290
Pr.374
Pr.387 to Pr.389, Pr.391, Pr.392
Pr.414, Pr.415, Pr.498, Pr.675, Pr.1150 to Pr.1199
Pr.418
Pr.442 to Pr.445
Pr.447, Pr.448
Pr.450, Pr.451, Pr.453 to Pr.462, Pr.463 and others
Pr.505
Pr.506
Pr.507 Pr.509 Pr.553, Pr.554 Pr.560 Pr.570 Pr.575 to Pr.577 Pr.592 to Pr.597
Pr.609, Pr.610
Pr.631 Pr.639
Compatibility
12
131
12
Compatibility
Parameter/function
Differences with the FR-E700 Addition Modification Deletion Related parameter
Remarks
Brake operation frequency selection
Pr.640
Speed smoothing cutoff frequency
Pr.654
SF-PR slip amount adjustment
Pr.673, Pr.674
Input terminal filter
Pr.699
The terminal response can be adjusted.
Device instance
Pr.728, Pr.729
Second motor constant and related settings
Pr.737 to Pr.746
PID unit selection
Pr.759
Operation panel monitor item selection
Pr.774 to Pr.776
Operation frequency during communication error
Pr.779
Acceleration time in low-speed
range deceleration time in low-speed
range
Pr.791, Pr.792
� Addition of Real sensorless vector control speed control, torque control
Control mode selection
� Addition of Vector control
Pr.800, Pr.702 to Pr.712,
speed control, torque control, position control
Pr.717, Pr.720, Pr.721, Pr.724, � Addition of PM sensorless vector control
Pr.725, and others
speed control � Deletion of General-purpose magnetic flux vector
control
� Setting value for V/F control changed to 40
Pr.801, Pr.803 to Pr.817,
Pr.820, Pr.821, Pr.823 to
Real sensorless vector control, Vector control
Pr.825, Pr.828, Pr.830, Pr.831, Pr.833 to Pr.835, Pr.840 to
Pr.848, Pr.858, Pr.874, Pr.877
to Pr.881 and others
Analog input offset adjustment
Pr.849
Low speed detection
Terminal 4 function
AM output filter
Speed detection hysteresis
OLT level setting
Energy saving monitoring
PID display
Display safety fault code
Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection
Fault initiation
PM parameter initialization
Automatic parameter setting
Clock function
Trace function
Monitor filter
Inverter-to-inverter link function
Inverter identification enable/ disable selection
Ethernet communication
function
(CC-Link IE TSN and others)
Load characteristics fault detection
Functional safety (SIL3)
Encoder feedback control
6-point frequency jump
Increased magnetic excitation deceleration
Advanced optimum excitation control
CC-Link IE TSN Safety communication function
CIPsafety
PROFIsafe
Free thermal (electronic thermal O/L relay function)
Pr.865
Pr.858, Pr.932 to Pr.933 Pr.867 Pr.870 Pr.874 Pr.891 to Pr.899 Pr.934 to Pr.935 Pr.986
Pr.992
Pr.997 Pr.998 Pr.999 Pr.1006 to Pr.1008 Pr.1020 to Pr.1047
Pr.1106 to Pr.1108
Pr.1124, Pr.1125
Filter for monitoring of torque, running speed, and excitation current
Pr.1399
Pr.1424 to Pr.1457
FR-E700-NE supports CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, MODBUS/TCP, MELSOFT / FA product connection, and SLMP.
Pr.1480 to Pr.1492
Pr.S001 to Pr.S027, Pr.S051, Pr.S055, Pr.S061, Pr.S066, Pr.S070, Pr.S071
Pr.285, Pr.359, Pr.367 to Pr.369, Pr.376
Pr.552
Pr.660 to Pr.662
Pr.60, Pr.9, Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.83, Pr.84, Pr.800
Pr.S030 to Pr.S032
Pr.S135 to Pr.S149
Pr.S089
Pr.600 to Pr.604, Pr.692 to Pr.696
132
Major differences between the standard model (FR-E800), Ethernet model (FR-E800-E), and safety communication model (FR-E800-SCE)
Item Name
Applicable motor capacity
Output, power supply, protective structure,
cooling system, approximate mass Outline dimension / Installation dimension Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal
Contact input
Analog input Relay output Open collector
Output Pulse output Analog output
Safety I/O signal
Ethernet
Communication
Safety communication
RS-485 USB
Option unit
FR-E800
FR-E800-E
Standard model
Ethernet model
ND rating: 0.1 to 22 kW
LD rating: 0.2 to 30 kW
(Same for FR-E800, FR-E800-E, and FR-E800-SCE)
FR-E800-SCE Safety communication model
Same for FR-E800, FR-E800-E, and FR-E800-SCE
R, S, T, U, V, W, P, PR, N, P1, earth (ground)
(Same for FR-E800, FR-E800-E, and FR-E800-SCE)
7 terminals: STF, STR, RH, RM, RL, MRS, RES, SD, PC
2 terminals: DI0, DI1, SD, PC
N/A
2 terminals: 2, 4, 10, 5 (Same for FR-E800, FR-E800-E, and FR-E800-SCE)
1 terminal: A, B, C (Same for FR-E800, FR-E800-E, and FR-E800-SCE)
2 terminals: RUN, FU, SE
N/A
1 terminal: FM type only
N/A
1 terminal: AM type only
N/A
1 terminal: S1, S2, SO, SOC
(Same for FR-E800, FR-E800-E, and FR-E800-SCE)
Available, two ports
N/A
CC-Link TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, MODBUS/TCP, BACnet/IP
CC-Link IE TSN Safety
N/A
communication function
CIPsafety, PROFIsafe
Available, one port
Mitsubishi inverter protocol
N/A
MODBUS RTU
Available, mini B connector, USB bus power available
1 slot
CC-Link, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS-DP
Related manuals
The manuals related to the FR-E800 inverter are as follows. The download of the latest manuals is free at the Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website.
Safety
Manual name
Description
Standard model
Ethernet model
communication
Manual number
model
FR-E800 INVERTER SAFETY GUIDELINE
(100V/200V/
400V)
IB-0600857ENG
FR-E800-E INVERTER SAFETY GUIDELINE
(100V/200V/
400V)
IB-0600860ENG
FR-E800-SCE INVERTER SAFETY GUIDELINE
Basic wiring and operation (Instruction Manual enclosed with the inverter)
(100V/200V/ IB-0600921ENG
400V)
FR-E860 INVERTER SAFETY GUIDELINE
(575V)
IB-0600862ENG
FR-E860-E INVERTER SAFETY GUIDELINE
(575V)
IB-0600863ENG
FR-E860-SCE INVERTER SAFETY GUIDELINE
(575V)
IB-0600924ENG
FR-E800 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (CONNECTION)
FR-E860 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (CONNECTION)
Installation and wiring, precautions for use of the inverter
(100V/200V/ (100V/200V/ (100V/200V/ IB-0600865ENG
400V)
400V)
400V)
(575V)
(575V)
(575V)
IB-0600906ENG
FR-E800 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
Basic operation, description of functions (parameters)
IB-0600868ENG
FR-E800 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (COMMUNICATION)
Wiring and settings for communication
IB-0600871ENG
FR-E800 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (MAINTENANCE)
Protective functions, precautions for maintenance and inspection
IB-0600874ENG
FR-E800(-E) INSTRUCTION MANUAL (FUNCTIONAL SAFETY)
FR-E800-SCE INSTRUCTION MANUAL (FUNCTIONAL SAFETY)
Details of functional safety
BCN-A23488-000
BCN-A23488-004
PLC Function Programming Manual Use of the PLC function
IB-0600492ENG
FR Configurator2 INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Details of the inverter setup software
IB-0600516ENG
Compatibility
12
133
MEMO
134
Warranty
When using this product, make sure to understand the warranty described below.
1. Warranty period and coverage
We will repair any failure or defect (hereinafter referred to as "failure") in our FA equipment (hereinafter referred to as the "Product") arisen during warranty period at no charge due to causes for which we are responsible through the distributor from which you purchased the Product or our service provider. However, we will charge the actual cost of dispatching our engineer for an on-site repair work on request by customer in Japan or overseas countries. We are not responsible for any on-site readjustment and/or trial run that may be required after a defective unit are repaired or replaced.
[Term] The term of warranty for Product is twelve months after your purchase or delivery of the Product to a place designated by you or eighteen months from the date of manufacture whichever comes first ("Warranty Period"). Warranty period for repaired Product cannot exceed beyond the original warranty period before any repair work.
[Limitations] (1) You are requested to conduct an initial failure diagnosis by yourself, as a general rule. It can also be carried out by us or our service company upon your request and the actual cost will be charged. However, it will not be charged if we are responsible for the cause of the failure. (2) This limited warranty applies only when the condition, method, environment, etc. of use are in compliance with the terms and conditions and instructions that are set forth in the instruction manual and user manual for the Product and the caution label affixed to the Product. (3) Even during the term of warranty, the repair cost will be charged on you in the following cases; 1) a failure caused by your improper storing or handling, carelessness or negligence, etc., and a failure caused by your hardware or software problem 2) a failure caused by any alteration, etc. to the Product made on your side without our approval 3) a failure which may be regarded as avoidable, if your equipment in which the Product is incorporated is equipped with a safety device required by applicable laws and has any function or structure considered to be indispensable according to a common sense in the industry 4) a failure which may be regarded as avoidable if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual, etc. are duly maintained and replaced 5) any replacement of consumable parts (condenser, cooling fan, etc.) 6) a failure caused by external factors such as inevitable accidents, including without limitation fire and abnormal fluctuation of voltage, and acts of God, including without limitation earthquake, lightning and natural disasters 7) a failure generated by an unforeseeable cause with a scientific technology that was not available at the time of the shipment of the Product from our company 8) any other failures which we are not responsible for or which you acknowledge we are not responsible for
2. Term of warranty after the stop of production (1) We may accept the repair at charge for another seven (7) years after the production of the product is discontinued. The announcement of the stop of production for each model can be seen in our Sales and Service, etc. (2) Please note that the Product (including its spare parts) cannot be ordered after its stop of production.
3. Service in overseas Our regional FA Center in overseas countries will accept the repair work of the Product; however, the terms and conditions of the repair work may differ depending on each FA Center. Please ask your local FA center for details.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to: (1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi. (2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products. (3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products. (4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Change of Product specifications Specifications listed in our catalogs, manuals or technical documents may be changed without notice.
6. Application and use of the Product (1) For the use of our product, its applications should be those that may not result in a serious damage even if any failure or malfunction occurs in product, and a backup or fail-safe function should operate on an external system to product when any failure or malfunction occurs.
(2) Our product is designed and manufactured as a general purpose product for use at general industries. Therefore, applications substantially influential on the public interest for such as atomic power plants and other power plants of electric power companies, and also which require a special quality assurance system, including applications for railway companies and government or public offices are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these applications when used. In addition, applications which may be substantially influential to human lives or properties for such as airlines, medical treatments, railway service, incineration and fuel systems, man-operated material handling equipment, entertainment machines, safety machines, etc. are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these applications when used. We will review the acceptability of the abovementioned applications, if you agree not to require a specific quality for a specific application. Please contact us for consultation.
Warranty
13
135
India Coimbatore FA Center MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDIA PVT. LTD. Coimbatore Branch
Production bases Under the lead of Nagoya Works, we form a powerful network to optimize our manufacturing processes.
Domestic bases
Nagoya Works
Production bases overseas
MDI Mitsubishi Electric Dalian Industrial Products Co., Ltd.
MEI Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt.
Shinshiro Factory Kani Factory
136
MEAMC Mitsubishi Electric Automation Manufacturing (Changshu) Co., Ltd. MEATH Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Thailand) Co., Ltd.
Philippines FA Center MELCO FACTORY AUTOMATION PHILIPPINES INC.
137
This solution solves customers' issues and concerns by enabling visualization and analysis that lead to improvements and increase availability at production sites.
Utilizing our FA and IT technologies and collaborating with e-F@ctory Alliance partners, we reduce the total cost across the entire supply chain and engineering chain, and support the improvement initiatives and one-step-ahead manufacturing of our customers.
FA integrated solutions reduce total cost
Supply chain
Engineering chain
Procurement
Product Process
design
design
iQ-Works/EZSocket
(CAD/simulation linkage)
Production and
manufacturing
Sale, logistics, and service
Operation/Maintenance
iQ Care
(prevention, predictive maintenance, remote maintenance service)
138
Overall production information is captured in addition to energy information, enabling the realization of efficient production and energy use (energy savings).
�Trademarks
PROFIBUS, PROFINET, and PROFIsafe are either trademarks or registered trademarks of PROFIBUS & PROFINET International. DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP, and CIP safety are either trademarks or registered trademarks of ODVA. EtherCAT is a trademark of Beckhoff Automation GmbH. Safety over EtherCAT is a trademark of Beckhoff Automation GmbH. MODBUS is a registered trademark of SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC USA, INC. BACnet is a registered trademark of the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Corporation in Japan. CC-Link IE TSN and CC-Link IE Field Network Basic are registered trademarks of CC-Link Partner Association. QR Code registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc. Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks of Google LLC. Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Safety Warning
To ensure proper use of the products listed in this catalog, please be sure to read the instruction manual prior to use.
Automation solutions
YOUR SOLUTION PARTNER
Low voltage: MCCB, MCB, ACB
Medium voltage: VCB, VCC
Power monitoring, energy management
Mitsubishi Electric offers a wide range of automation equipment from PLCs and HMIs to CNC and EDM machines.
Compact and Modular Controllers
A NAME TO TRUST
Since its beginnings in 1870, some 45 companies use the Mitsubishi name, covering a spectrum of finance, commerce and industry.
The Mitsubishi brand name is recognized around the world as a symbol of premium quality.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation is active in space development, transportation, semi-conductors, energy systems, communications and information processing, audio visual equipment and home electronics, building and energy management and automation systems, and has 237 factories and laboratories worldwide in over 121 countries.
This is why you can rely on Mitsubishi Electric automation solution - because we know first hand about the need for reliable, efficient, easy-to-use automation and control in our own factories.
As one of the world's leading companies with a global turnover of over 4 trillion Yen (over $40 billion), employing over 100,000 people, Mitsubishi Electric has the resource and the commitment to deliver the ultimate in service and support as well as the best products.
Inverters, Servos and Motors Visualisation: HMIs Numerical Control (NC)
Robots: SCARA, Articulated arm
Processing machines: EDM, Lasers, IDS
* Not all products are available in all countries.
Transformers, Air conditioning, Photovoltaic systems 139
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Nagoya Works is a factory certified for ISO 14001 (standards for environmental management systems) and ISO 9001 (standards for quality assurance management systems).
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
L(NA)06131ENG-C (2101) MEE